Ac71770 2015 PDF

Content Pages
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

2 3 4 5
Army Code 71770
ALL ARMS
TACTICAL
AIDE MEMOIRE
Prepared under the direction of

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 The Chief of the General Staff
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS & Conditions
of Release
COPYRIGHT
The information contained within this publication is British Crown
Copyright and the intellectual property rights belong exclusively to
the Ministry of Defence (MOD). Material and information contained in
this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system and
transmitted for MOD use only, except where authority for use by other
organisations or individuals has been authorised by the officer whose
details appear below.
SECURITY
This OFFICIAL document is issued for the information of such persons
who need to know its contents in the course of their duties. Any person
finding this document should hand it to a British Forces unit or to a police
station for its safe return to the Ministry of Defence, Def Sy, Main Building,
Whitehall, LONDON SW1A 2HB with particulars of how it was found.
This information is released by the United Kingdom Government to
international organisations and national governments for defence
purposes only. The information must be afforded the same degree of
protection as that afforded to information of an equivalent classification
originated by the recipient organisation or nation, or as required by the
recipient organisation or nation’s security regulations. The information
may only be disclosed within the Defence Departments of the recipient
organisation or nation, except as otherwise authorised by the UK MOD.
This information may be subject to privately owned rights.
STATUS
This publication has been produced under the direction and authority of
the Chief of the General Staff by Director Land Warfare in his capacity
as sponsor of Army Doctrine. It is the individual’s responsibility to ensure
that he or she is using the latest version of this publication. If in doubt the
individual should contact the Directorate of Land Warfare (details below).
Distribution
As directed by Director Land Warfare.
CONTACT DETAILS
Suggestions for change or queries are welcomed and should be sent to
SO1 Tac Doc Pubs, Directorate of Land Warfare, Land Warfare Centre,
Imber Road, Warminster BA12 0DJ,
Telephone +44(0)1985 848764.
RECORD OF AMENDMENTS
Amendment Number Date Amended Initials
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PREFACE
This All Arms Tactical Aide Memoire (AATAM) replaces the AATAM
Issue 6.0, 2013, which is obsolete and should be destroyed.
The purpose of the AATAM is to provide a useful set of aids and
headings for Company, Platoon and Section Commanders (and their
equivalents) to use during operations and training.
Individual pages can be removed; this should be
coordinated within the sub-unit chain of command. A few
additional filofax sized pages can be inserted at will.
More detailed doctrine is available at:
Army Knowledge Exchange (AKX)
British Army Electronic Battlebox (BAeBB)
DCDC Joint Doctrine Webpage
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 I

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
II Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
CONTENTS
Accident and Incident Notification IX

SECTION 1
DOCTRINE AIDE MEMOIRE
Fighting Power 1-1

Principles of War 1-1
Conflict Themes 1-2
Core Tenets & Land Doctrine Hierarchy 1-3
Manoeuvrist Approach 1-4
Military Activities in Land Environment 1-7
Doctrinal Frameworks 1-7
Tactical Functions 1-9
Land Tactical Actions 1-10
Offensive Actions 1-10
Defensive Actions 1-11
Stabilising Actions 1-12
Enabling Actions 1-12
Forms of Manoeuvre 1-13
SECTION 2
PLANNING
Tac and Ground Brief 2-1

Battle Procedure 2-2
Combat Estimate/Planning
Platoon Time Analysis 2-4
Company Time Analysis 2-6
7 Q Overview 2-8
The Combat Estimate Process 2-9
Ground/IPE 2-12
Risk Management 2-13
Command and Control Relationships 2-15
Writing Mission Statements 2-16
CONOP’s 2-17
Commander’s Backbrief 2-17
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 III

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Effects/Action Terms and Graphics 2-18

Map Marking 2-40
Planning Data
A & PM Vehicle Planning Data 2-42
B Vehicle Characteristics 2-45
Artillery Planning Data 2-46
Air Defence Planning Data 2-47
Organic ISTAR Planning Data 2-48
Base ISTAR Planning Data 2-51
Weapon Locating Radar Planning Data 2-54
EW Planning Data 2-55
Search Equipment Planning Data 2-57
Personal Weapon Planning Data 2-58
Aviation Equipment Planning Data 2-61
Air Delivered Munitions Planning Data 2-63
Risk Estimate Distance (RED) Guidance 2-67
Small Arms Direct Fire Ranges 2-69
Enemy Weapons Planning Data 2-71
Indirect Fire Splinter Distances 2-72
CIS Planning Considerations for 7Q 2-74
Bowman Planning Data 2-76
Conversion Tables 2-78
UK Operations Guidance 2-79
IV Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 3
ORDERS

Warning Orders and Prelims 3-1
Quick Attack 3-2
Generic Orders Formats 3-3
Advance to Contact and Deliberate Attack 3-5
Night Attack 3-6
Defence 3-7
Withdrawal 3-9
Relief in Place 3-10
Patrol 3-11
Recce 3-12
Observation Posts and Standing Patrols 3-14
Anti-Personnel Ambush 3-17
Anti-Armour Ambush 3-20
Fighting Patrol/Raid 3-23
Demolition Guard 3-25
Breaching and Obstacle Crossing 3-26
House Clearing 3-27
Convoys and Escorts 3-28
Vehicle Check Points 3-29
Aviation Operations 3-30

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 V

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 4
ACTIONS
Battlefield Discipline 4-1

Section Battle Drills 4-4
Tactical Checklist 4-5
Offensive Actions 4-6
Defensive Actions 4-7
Delay 4-10
Patrolling 4-12
Advance to Contact 4-15
Withdrawal 4-17
Relief of Troops 4-19
Ambushes 4-21
Urban Operations 4-23
SECTION 5
CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS
Command
States of Readiness 5-1
Communications 5-4
Combat ID 5-6
Liaison 5-7
Media Handling 5-9
Law of Armed Conflict 5-11
Handling of CPERS 5-13
Trauma Risk Management 5-16
Mentoring 5-20
Understanding & Information Activity

Intelligence Briefs/Debriefs 5-24
Patrol Report 5-25
Walk-Ins/CASCONs 5-28
A-H/SCRIM 5-29
Working with Interpreters 5-30
Material and Personnel Exploitation (MPE) 5-31
VI Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Firepower
Fire Support Coordination Measures 5-32
Methods of Indication 5-33
Dismounted Section/Patrol Contact Drills 5-34
Manoeuvre
Heli Drills & HLS Marking 5-37
Desert Box 5-39
Heli Mount/Dismount Approach Angles 5-40
NATO T 5-41
Aviation loading 5-43
Heli Deplanning Techniques 5-44
GO / NO-GO Criteria 5-46
Use of IR Illum in Heli Black Light Ops 5-47
DCC Hand Signals 5-48
AFV Light/Hand Signals 5-54
Basic Convoy Discipline Drills 5-58
Road Move Checklist 5-59
Hide Drills 5-60
DCC Fight Light Guidance 5-61
Marking of an FUP 5-63
Defile Marking 5-64
Protection
Routine 5-65
Patrol Harbours 5-67
STAP 5-69
Sentry Duties/Checklists 5-70
Emergency Alarms and Signals 5-75
Chemical Safety Rule 5-76
CBRN 5-77
CSCM/EMCON 5-81
Potential IED/Minefield Indicators 5-82
Characteristics of Sign 5-83
5/20m Checks 5-84
Mine Awareness 5-85
Mine Encounter Drill 5-86
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 VII

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
IED Actions On 5-87

EOD Requests Priorities 5-88
VP/VA Identification 5-89
VP 360 5-90
Op BARMA Dismounted VP/VA Checks 5-94
Op KALA Compound Clearance 5-98
Route Proving and Clearing 5-100
All Arms Air Defence 5-101
Weapon Control States 5-102
Digging (Trench Examples) 5-103
Forces Protection Engineering Aide Memoire 5-107
Protective Slots for A Vehicles 5-108
Insider Threat 5-109
Insider Threat Actions On 5-112
Medical Eligibility on Operations 5-116
Mech Unit Vehicle Rollover Drills 5-117

Sustainment
Equipment Care 5-120
Balancing GPMG 5-122
Equipment/Vehicle Denial 5-123
Emergency Burial 5-125
Environmental Health 5-127
Air Dispatch Planning 5-130
Basic Knots 5-136
VIII Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT NOTIFICATION
Reporting of Incidents and Accidents. The following are notifiable

occurrences and must be reported to the Army Incident Notification
Cell (AINC):
• Death. All incidents resulting in death.
• Injury. Injuries arising from MoD activities, including:
• Major injuries requiring professional medical treatment.
• Injuries resulting in more than 3 days’ light duties or off work
including occupational stress and absence.
• Climatic injuries including hypothermia, heat exhaustion, heat
stroke, freezing cold and non freezing cold injuries.
• Injuries resulting from sporting activities and adventurous
training.
• Injuries resulting from on and off duty RTAs.
• Near Misses. Near misses which have the potential to cause harm
to personnel or damage to MoD property and equipment.
• Occupational Disease and Dangerous Occurrences.
Occupational illnesses, diseases and dangerous occurrences
within the workplace.
• Equipment Damage/Failings. Serious damage to equipment and
incidents of serious equipment failure (also reported to SEFIT - see
Table below).
• Ammunition and Explosives. All ammunition and explosive
incidents.
• Range Incursions. Range incursions by land, air or sea.
• Fire. All fires including vehicle and equipment fires.
• Environmental Incidents. Leaks and spillages of environmentally
hazardous materials and incidents of hazardous waste (e.g. POL,
paints, chemicals) being found improperly discarded on the military
estate or in the waste disposal system.
• Enforcement Action. Any enforcement action by the Health and
Safety Executive (HSE), the Environment Agency (EA), Defence
Fire Risk Management Organisation (DFERMO), local authorities
or their equivalent in Scotland, Northern Ireland or overseas.
Notification Procedure. In the case of death and serious injury

notification is to be made without delay. In other cases it should happen
as soon as possible. Notification is to be made to AINC by the following
means:
Means Number Remarks

Civ Telephone +44 (0)1264 382055 Manned 24/7
Mil Telephone 94391 2055 Manned 24/7
Civ Fax +44 (0)1264 382059 On Mod Form 510 if possible
Mil Fax 94391 2059 On Mod Form 510 if possible
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 IX

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ANY DOUBTS REPORT IT

In addition all units should report to the chain of command and continue
to make specific reports to:
Joint Casualty and Compassionate Cell (JCCC)

In cases of death or listed casualties reported by NOTICAS (JSP 751)
The LAND Accident Investigation Team (LAIT)

In cases of death, serious injury or serious equipment failure.
Telephone: +44 (0)1264 382206 or 94391 2206 (24/7)
Serious Equipment Failure Inspection Team (SEFIT)

By Signal and copy to AINC
UK - 96798 2540 or (+44) (0)306 7982540

Ge - 94881 3437 or (+49) 521 92543437
Joint Services EOD Ops Centre

Tel: 94234 3360 or +44(0)1235 513360
Local Fire Advisor

DFERMO officer at divisional level and garrison fire advisor in Ge.
RTA
In accordance with JSP 800 by FMT-3
ANY DOUBTS REPORT IT
X Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 1
DOCTRINE AIDE MEMOIRE

Content Pages
2 3 4 5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
WHAT IS DOCTRINE?
Doctrine is a set of beliefs or principles held and taught. Military doctrine
contains the fundamental principles that guide how military forces
conduct their actions - it provides the fundamentals necessary for the
effective and practical application of force. In the Land environment, the
sponsors for writing doctrine are DLW and the Capability Directorates,
but everyone can and must contribute to creating those ideas.
FIGHTING POWER
Fighting power consists of 3 components:
• Conceptual - the ideas behind how we fight

• Moral - the ability to get people to fight
• Physical - the means to fight
These are described in the diagram below:

Higher Level Doctrine Lower Level Doctrine
(Philosophy & Principles) (Practices & Procedures)
Understanding of
Conflict & Context Education, Innovation
and Lessons
Conceptual
Component
Manpower
Motivation
Equipment
Physical Moral
Component Component
Moral
Cohesion
Training
Sustainability
Capability Ethical
Development Foundations
THE PRINCIPLES OF WAR
Selection and Maintenance of the Aim Concentration of Force

Maintenance of Morale Economy of Effort
Offensive Action Flexibility
Security Cooperation
Surprise Sustainability
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-1

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
Selection and Maintenance of the Aim. The Master Principle of War. A

single unambiguous aim is at the heart of successful operations.
Maintenance of Morale. Morale is a positive state of mind derived from
inspired political and military leadership, a shared sense of purpose and
values, wellbeing, perceptions of worth and group cohesion.
Offensive Action. Offensive action is the practical way in which a
commander seeks to gain advantage, sustain momentum and seize the
initiative.
Security. Security is the provision and maintenance of an operating
environment that affords the freedom of action, when and where
required, to achieve objectives.
Surprise. Surprise is a feeling of relative confusion, or perhaps shock,
induced by the introduction of the unexpected.
Concentration of Force. Concentration of Force involves the decisive,
synchronized application of superior fighting power to realize intended
effects, when and where required.
Economy of Effort. Economy of effort is the judicious exploitation of
manpower. Materiel, time and influence in relation to the achievement
of objectives.
Flexibility. Flexibility entails the ability to change readily to meet new
circumstances; it comprises versatility, responsiveness, acuity and
adaptability.
Co-operation. Co-operation entails the incorporation of teamwork and
a sharing of dangers, burdens, risks and opportunities in every aspect
of warfare.
Sustainability. To sustain a force is to generate, and deliver, the means
by which its fighting power and freedom of action are maintained.
CONFLICT THEMES
The Nature of Conflict. Nature and character are 2 different things.
Nature is inherent and endures, character evolves. The nature of conflict
is that it will always be a violent contest: a mix of chance, risk and policy
whose underlying nature is human and volatile. There is always friction,
uncertainty and chaos, violence and danger and human stress.
The Character of Conflict. The character of conflict evolves. It changes
because of human experience and innovation and the dynamics of
conflict themselves.
Future Character of Conflict (FCOC). FCOC (published 2010) saw
the future Battlespace as:
• Congested. Operations are likely to be where the people are – in
urban environments and in the littoral. Physical, cognitive and virtual
domains will be increasingly interconnected.
• Cluttered. Clutter leads to an inability to distinguish individuals,
items or events.
1-2 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
• Contested. Adversaries will contest all environments where they

seek to deny our freedom of manoeuvre.
• Connected. Activity will gravitate towards interconnected nodes.
These nodes might be described as key terrain - infrastructure,
centres of governance, comms hubs and will exist in the physical
and virtual domains.
• Constrained. Western legal and societal norms will place constraints
on the conduct of ops.
LAND DOCTRINE HIERARCHY

Integrated Action: the Army’s unifying doctrine, applicable to all
overseas operational tasks.
Understanding: the perception and interpretation of a particular
situation to provide the context, insight, and foresight required for
effective decision making.
Manoeuvrist Approach: the Army’s fighting doctrine.
Mission Command: the Army’s philosophy of command.
Integrated Action recognises the multiplicity of connected actors,
audiences, adversaries and enemies that exist within the battlespace,
each requiring a subtly different blend of effects on their physical
capabilities, perceptions and will and cohesion in order to change
or maintain their behaviours. Delivery of these effects relies upon
understanding and is acheived by orchestrating manoeuvre, joint fires,
information activity and capacity building, planned primarily at the
Divisional level but executed throughout the land force.
CORE TENETS
The 3 core tenets of the British Army’s approach to operations are
Establishing Understanding, the Manoeuvrist Approach and Mission
Command.
Establishing Understanding. Acquiring and developing knowledge
to enable insight and foresight that allows us to achieve information
superiority (maintain tempo by knowing more of the relevant information
than other actors, and using it more quickly). Importantly, commanders
must be willing to take risks on incomplete information to retain the
initiative.
The Manoeuvrist Approach. Is an indirect approach to operations
that involves using and threatening to use force in a combination of
violent and non-violent means. It concentrates on seizing the initiative
and applying strength against weakness, while protecting the same on
our own side.
Mission Command. Underpins the manoeuvrist approach by upholding
a command philosophy of centralized intent and decentralized execution
that promotes freedom of action and initiative. It relies on commanders
giving orders such that subordinates understand their intent and
allowing subordinates to decide how best to achieve it.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-3

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
THE MANOEUVRIST APPROACH

The Fundamentals:
• An attitude of mind. The effect achieved is more important than how
it is done. It is based on an understanding and ability to manipulate
human nature and to exploit opportunities to reduce an adversary’s
fighting power.
• Practical Knowledge. Broad foundations of practical professional
knowledge instill confidence which in turn provides the freedom to
innovate.
• Philosophy of Command. The doctrine of Mission Command.
Application. Application requires 5 skills:
• Understand the Situation. An individual’s comprehension or
judgement of a situation based on information (unprocessed
data), intelligence (processed information) and intuition. It provides
the context for effective decision making. It consists of people
(motivations, behaviors, beliefs, culture and likely reactions), ground,
the outcomes sought, the effects to achieve them and a vision of
success.
• Seizing and Holding the Initiative. The initiative is the ability to
dictate the course of events – to think or act before an adversary.
The commander needs to be right, first; making assessments,
anticipating correctly and then selecting, communicating and acting
on the right choices, all more effectively than his adversary.
• Influencing Perceptions. Influence is an outcome – a result of
activity rather than an activity in itself. It is achieved when perceptions
and behaviours are changed through the use of power; directly or
indirectly. It is not just about messaging, but rather how words and
deeds are interpreted and understood by audiences through varying
lenses. Perceptions are influenced through the levers of Joint Action:
• Fires
• Manoeuvre
• Outreach
• Information Activities
• Breaking Adversaries’ Will and Cohesion. Through achieving a
combination of:
• Surprise. Through unexpected timing, direction or method. Key
factors in achieving surprise are: deception, intelligence, security,
speed and originality. Surprise need only be sufficient to delay an
adversary’s decision until it is too late.
• Pre-emption. Seizing an opportunity in order to deny an adver-
sary the advantage before he can exploit it.
• Dislocation. To deny an adversary the ability to bring his
strengths to bear. To render his strength irrelevant.
• Disruption. To attack the enemy selectively to break apart and
confuse the assets which are critical to the employment and co-
herence of an adversary’s fighting power.
1-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
• Shock Action. The sudden, concentrated application of violence

to numb, deter and frighten.
• Destruction.
• Exploitation. The breaking of will and cohesion must be exploit-
ed to extend and expand its effects.
• Protecting Own and Population’s Will and Cohesion. Protect our
own will and cohesion whilst seeking to break our adversary’s. It may
also be important to protect the population’s.
Enhancing the Manoeuvrist Approach:
• Simplicity. Simple plans are less vulnerable to friction. Minimise the
number of actions dependent on a previous action. Plans should
have multiple paths to success.
• Flexibility. An individual’s ability to consider alternatives and the
physical ability to transition from one activity to another which is
enhanced by thorough grouping, training, battle procedure and drills.
• Tempo. The rhythm or rate of activity relative to an adversary’s.
• Momentum.
• Simultaneity. Overloading the adversary such that he cannot
concentration any one, nor establish the priorities between them.
• Air Power.
MISSION COMMAND
From JDP 0.1, 2014, pg 103. The UK’s philosophy of mission command
has four enduring tenets:
• Timely decision making.
• Thorough understanding of a superior commander’s intent.
• Clear responsibility on the part of subordinates to fulfil intent.
• Determination to take the plan through to a successful conclusion.
The fundamental guiding principle is the absolute responsibility to act,
or to decide not to act, within the framework of a superior commander’s
intent.
In practical terms, mission command has five essential elements:
• Commanders must ensure that their subordinates understand their
intent, their own contributions and the context within which they are
to act.
• Commanders should exercise a minimum of control over their
subordinates, consistent with their experience and ability, while
retaining responsibility for their actions.
• Subordinates are told what effect they are to realise and why.
• Subordinates are allocated sufficient resources to carry out their
missions.
• Subordinates decide for themselves how best to achieve their
superior’s intent.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
A Summary of the Manoeuvrist Approach DOCTRINE
1-6 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
THE 6 MILITARY ACTIVITIES IN THE LAND

ENVIRONMENT
The primary purpose of land forces is Combat.
Deliberate and Focused Intervention. As part of a DI, UK Forces will

conduct operations to remove an aggressor from territory and protect it
from further aggression. FI are usually intended to be of short duration
with limited objectives of scope. They can be offensive and may be a
precursor to a larger more deliberate intervention.
Military Assistance to Stabilisation and Development. Likely to
overlap with other military activities such as conflict prevention, or could
follow a DI.
Counter Insurgency. Those military, paramilitary, political, economic,
psychological and civil actions taken by a government or its partners to
defeat an insurgency.
Peace Support. Activities, usually in support of a UN mandate to
restore or maintain peace.
Peacetime Military Engagement and Conflict Prevention. Activities
intended to shape the security environment in peace time.
UK Resilience and Military Aid to the Civil Authorities. MACA is
divided into:
• Military Aid to the Civil Community (MACC) – unarmed support to
the authorities (eg emergency assistance).
• Military Aid to OGDs (MAGD) – includes urgent work of national
importance to maintain supplies and services essential to life.
• Military Aid to the Civil Power (MACP) - forces to assist the civil
power in the maintenance of law and order.
DOCTRINAL FRAMEWORKS
Operational Framework:
• Understanding - the collection of information by ISTAR activity

and its analysis to create intelligence and understanding to support
effective decision making.
• Shaping - create or preserve the conditions for the success of the
mission-decisive actions, before, during or after it. These conditions
may relate to adversaries, the environment (both physical and
human) or the force itself.
• Decisive - the activity which, if successful, should lead to the
achievement of the mission. Usually specified as part of the mission
or its component tasks - ‘mission decisive’.
• Sustaining - enabling forces to survive, move and fight.
• Protecting - preserves the capabilities of a force.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-7

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
Tactical Framework:
• Find - locating, identifying, tracking and assessing an adversary,
the population of the environment. It endures throughout an
operation.
• Fix - to deny an adversary his goals, to distract him and thus
deprive him of his freedom of action.
• Strike - to manoeuvre and then take direct action to achieve the
mission.
• Exploit - seizing an opportunity created by previous activity in order
to achieve an objective.
The Geographic Framework:

• Deep - activity usually conducted at long range and over a
protracted timescale.
• Close - activity usually involving forces in direct contact usually
over an immediate timescale.
• Rear - usually administrative and logistic areas out of contact.
1-8 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
The COIN / Stabilisation Framework:

• Shape - activity to influence and inform perceptions, allegiances,
attitudes, actions and behaviours.
• Secure - provides the population the ability to go about their daily
lives without fear of violence and enables them to turn against the
insurgency. Security is both physical and psychological and must
be persistent.
• Develop - activity which builds on the opportunity which security
offers and include: Military Capacity Building; Establishment or
restoration of essential services; governance; economy.
Defence Capability Framework:

• Operate - application of the military instrument.
• Command - authority to influence events and issue orders, through
leadership, decision-making and control.
• Inform - the collection, management and exploitation of information
and intelligence.
• Prepare - provision of properly developed forces.
• Project - intervention at a time and place of our choosing.
• Protect - countering threats to operational effectiveness.
• Sustain - maintaining fighting power and freedom of action.
THE TACTICAL FUNCTIONS

The practical expression of the physical component of fighting power
at the tactical level.
Command. The exercise of military authority by a designated
commander for the planning direction, coordination and control of a
military force. Control is a supporting means by which command is
exercised and regulated.
Understanding. The perception and interpretation of a situation to
provide the context required for effective decision making.
Information Activity. Non-lethal messaging (media, psyops, posture -
presence - profile) to alter people’s perceptions and behaviours.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-9

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
Firepower. Firepower destroys, neutralizes and suppresses. Definition

also includes methods which are not necessarily physically destructive.
Manoeuvre. Manoeuvre involves coordinated activity to gain advantage
in time and space. Manoeuvre enhances the effects of firepower and
firepower, in turn, enables manoeuvre.
Protection. Protection preserves the fighting power of a force.
Sustainment. Includes the sustenance and moral well-being of troops,
the maintenance of equipment and materiel, the provision of expendable
commodities and the treatment and replacement of casualties.
LAND TACTICAL ACTIONS
Offensive Actions Defensive Actions Stabilising Actions
Attack Framework Security

Raid Security sector
Exploitation reform and military
Pursuit capacity building
Feint Mobile defence Support to delivery
of essential services
Demonstration Area defence
Support to
Reconnaissance Delay
governance,
in force
economic
Ambush development and
Breakout of reconstruction
encircled forces
Infiltration
Enabling Actions
Link-up
Reconnaissance Retirement
Relief of encircled
Security March
forces
Advance to contact Breaching and
Relief of troops
Meeting engagement crossing obstacles
Withdrawal
OFFENSIVE ACTIONS
To defeat the enemy through the use or threat of force.
Types:
Attack:
• Deliberate Attack. To defeat the adversary with an emphasis on

massing fighting power at the expense of time
• Hasty Attack. To defeat the adversary, trading mass for time in order
to seize fleeting opportunities.
1-10 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
• Counter Attack. To defeat an adversary made vulnerable by his own

offensive action.
• Spoiling Attack. To disrupt an adversary made vulnerable by his
own offensive action.
Raid. A swift penetration of hostile territory to secure information,

confuse, seize a HVT or destroy physical positions. Ends with a
withdrawal.
Exploitation. A rapid advance against lessening resistance. Intent
to retain the initiative by preventing an opponent from conducting
organized actions and to create confusion and apprehension.
Pursuit. To catch or cut off a hostile escaping force. Usually follows an
exploitation.
Feint. To distract an enemy by seeking combat.
Demonstration. To distract an enemy without seeking contact.
Reconnaissance in Force. Used to induce an enemy to disclose
information by making him respond to offensive action.
Ambush. To inflict damage on an enemy while denying him the
opportunity to respond, principally through surprise in an action
concentrated in time and space.
Breakout of Encircled Forces. An encircled force takes offensive
action to link up with the main force.
Infiltration. Penetration using stealth, probably to gain understanding
or to execute another offensive action.
DEFENSIVE ACTIONS
To defeat or deter a threat. Usually intended to protect the force and to
provide the right conditions for offensive actions.
Types:
Mobile Defence. Defeat an adversary’s attack through destruction.
Combines a fixing element which denies the adversary freedom of
manoeuvre and an element to counter-attack.
Area Defence. Defeat an attack through denial of ground through a
concentration of forces and c-mob effects.
Delay. A force being pressed by an attacking adversary trades space for
time, reducing the adversary’s momentum and combat power without
becoming decisively committed.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-11

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
STABILISING ACTIONS
Bespoke tactical methods for implementing MASD. They operate in
conjunction with the other Tactical Actions.
Framework Security. Security creates the conditions in which other
activity crucial to well-being can take place. Security of civilians
becomes paramount. Actions include: reassurance, public order and
population control, incident response and protection of key sites.
Security Sector Reform (SSR) and Military Capacity Building
(MCB). Consider the following: Armed Forces; Police; Gendarmerie;
IandS Services; Border and Customs guards; Security Management
Oversight Bodies (those with executive authority over security actors);
Justice and Law enforcement Institutions (the Judiciary, prisons,
investigative bodies, prosecution authorities); Non-statutory Security
Forces: PMCs, guerilla forces, private bodyguards.
Support to the Provision of Essential Services. Where the security
situation demands, military forces may become involved in the provision
of essential services (e.g. water, sewerage, food, electricity) in the short
term. Longer term, civilian specialists should take the lead leaving the
military to concentrate on providing security to those sites.
ENABLING ACTIONS
Enabling actions link other Tactical Actions together.
Reconnaissance. To obtain, by observation and detection, information
and understanding about adversaries, other actors and the physical
environment.
Security. Actions providing warning of adversary actions in order
to protect the force. They buy time in order to allow a force to react
effectively. There are 2 types: Screen - a cover force and Guards - a
screen with the addition of fires or offensive action.
Advance to Contact. Seeks to regain contact with an adversary under
the most favourable conditions, usually in preparation for offensive
action.
Meeting Engagement. An intentional or unintentional engagement
between 2 moving forces. Neither is prepared for defence and there is
an element of surprise on both sides.
Link-Up. To join 2 or more units. Usually occurs in contested territory.
Relief of Encircled Forces. To enable the encircled force to regain the
initiative and restore its freedom of action.
1-12 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DOCTRINE
Relief of Troops. One force takes over another’s actions or activities.

3 types:
• Relief in place - all or part of a force is replaced by an incoming
unit.
• Forward Passage of Lines - one force moves through another.
• Rearward passage of lines - a force moving from contact usually
through another unit in defence.
Withdrawal. To disengage a force from physical contact with an

adversary. Note that contact may be maintained through indirect fire
or surveillance.
Retirement. Movement of a force away from and out of contact with
an adversary.
March. To move a force efficiently to its place of tactical employment.
Units should be prepared for contact, but should not be expecting it.
Breaching and crossing obstacles. Usually during the advance, but
may take place in defence and in other enabling actions. Note that in
itself, a crossing / breaching operation will involve a number of other
enabling actions (e.g. FPOL).
FORMS OF MANOEUVRE
Incorporates both ground and air manoeuvre. Manoeuvre has utility
in all the tactical activities and at all levels. Manoeuvre is to gain a
position of advantage - physically and / or psychologically. The following
forms of manoeuvre are illustrative and must be applied imaginatively.
Envelopment. An offensive manoeuvre in which the attacking force
passes around or over the adversary’s principal defensive position
to secure objectives in the rear. It is designed to apply force against
weakness but may require fixing activity against the adversary’s
strength to distract it.
Double Envelopment. As envelopment but on 2 axes and designed to
outflank and adversary forcing him to abandon his intentions, redeploy
or withdraw, or as a prelude to encirclement.
Encirclement. A double envelopment where both axes met to trap an
adversary and prevent it from breaking out.
Turning Movement. The attacking force passes around or over the
adversary’s principle defensive position to force him to abandon his
position or divert major forces to meet the new threat.
Penetration. Seeks to reach the depths of the enemy’s position on
one or a number of narrow axes. 4 types: Deep, Multiple, Combination,
Infiltration. Infiltration is penetration based on stealthy movement.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-13

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
1-14 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 2
PLANNING

Content Pages
2 3 4 5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
TAC AND GROUND BRIEF

(Use only those headings that are relevant and that you have time to brief)
Give any vital info that cannot wait for the end of the briefing
Preparation. Look at IPB if aval. Mark map. Select Ref Pts on map
and ID on ground.
Orientation. Use map and point out:

• Own present location (GR) and direction of N or facing.
• ID relevant ref points (and areas eg NAIs, TAIs) giving GRs, ranges
and mag bearings.
• Explain model/map/other aids (if used).
• ID major features pertinent to brief - towns, ridge, rivers, etc.
• Friendly Forces layout, incl bdrys and flank units.
Broad Description. Give broad description of the Op in relation to ref
points and other bullets used in orientation. Brief logically following flow
of the Op. Include:
En. (Left to Right, Front to Rear).
• Sit
• ID En
• Locs/Posns
• Axis
• Timings
• Obs (Natural, man-made and explosive)
• DFs
Own Forces. (Left to Right, Front to Rear).
• Gen Sit
• Msn and/or Tasks
• Concept of Ops
• Inc:
• Locs/Posns (inc OPs and Ptls)
• Bdys (inc/exc)
• Obj
• FirePlan and FSCM (p 5-26)
• FUP/LD
• Axes
• Obs
• Bounds/Planning lines
• KAs (in def)
Flank Units. Brief description of their locations and role in your plan.
Local population. Loc and any relevant detail.
Future Intentions. Describe how you see remainder of op going
(Endstate). Conclude with problems that may affect msn success.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-1

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
BATTLE PROCEDURE
Aim: The Aim of Battle Procedure is to ensure that a solder is sent into
battle without waste of time and with minimum of fuss, knowing exactly
what he has to do, how he is going to do it and what fire support he is
going to be given .
PRINCIPLES OF BATTLE PROCEDURE - C.A.K.E
• Concurrent Activity (and Rest). Warning Orders allow
subordinates to prepare for a new operation and initiate concurrent
activity. Rest should not be forgotten to ensure individuals are well
prepared for battle.
• Anticipation at all Levels. The anticipation of future tasks and
moves increases the time available to prepare for battle.
• (Thorough) Knowledge of the ORBAT and Grouping System. An
understanding of who is attached to whom and how each element
of the ORBAT interlinks with one another is elementary to efficient
battle prep.
• Efficient Drills. Properly understood battle drills save time. SOPs
and SOIs increase efficiency, standardise procedures and enable
attachments and detachments to quickly adapt to local practices;
they should be well known by all concerned, taught to attached
personnel and frequently practiced.
PAWPERSO
• Protection
• Ammunition
• Weapons
• Personal Camouflage
• Equipment
• Radios
• Specialist equipment
• Orders
STAGES
STAGE 1 - RECEIPT OF ORDERS
Receipt of Orders starts with a warning order and is followed by orders.

The purpose of the Receipt of Orders Brief (ROOB) is to provide a ‘catch
all’ brief for the Tactical HQ so that they are oriented to the problem at
the earliest opportunity and key issues to be considered during planning
are identified.
STAGE 2 - ESTABLISH THE TIME LINE MATRIX FOR PLANNING

1/3rd - 2/3rds Rule. The time available once orders have been received
should be apportioned in accordance with the 1/3rd - 2/3rds Rule:
2-2 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
First 1/3rd of the time available:

• Pl/Sect Comd conducts the decision making process.
• Give orders. This should start as early as possible through the issue
of warning orders to initiate battle procedure by subordinates.
Remaining 2/3rds of the time available:

• Time for Pl/Sect Comd to conduct the decision making process.
• Time for Pl/Sect Comd orders and for these to be cascaded down
until all troops are briefed.
• Time for the physical preparation for battle.
STAGE 3 - THE ESTIMATE

• IPB/IPE.
• Mission Analysis.
• Comd’s Direction/Desired Effects.
• Development of the Plan.
• Comd’s COA Decision.
• Warning Order.
STAGE 4 - PREPARATION OF ORDERS

The detailed content and structure of orders is in Section 2. The
following battle procedure should be adopted when preparing orders:
• Preliminaries.
• “Brief on: Site, Security, Admin, Aides, Met, Taskorg, Model/Ground”.
• Ground and orientation brief.
• O Group.
• Backbrief from subordinates (if applicable), questions.
CHECK NOTES
Check:
• The quality of information (e.g. CODEWORDS, Grid Refs, etc).

• Movement and fire support plans are coordinated and synchronized
with other units, in particular flanking forces and civilian actors (if
relevant).
• Control measures for mutually accessible targets are clearly defined.
• Fire support and tactical air control have been coordinated.
• Impact of terrain, environment and weather on potential for fratricide.
• Bdys and LoD Co-ordination and deconfliction measures have been
established.
• Combat ID measures, bearing in mind training and experience.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-3

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Platoon Time Analysis
Pl Comd Pl Sgt Sect Comd
Receives WngO
from Coy Comd
Conduct initial
time analysis
Consider Q
1&2
Issue WngO Receive WngO Receive WngO
Receive orders
from Coy Comd
Complete time
analysis
Platoon Commander’s ⅓
Answer Q 1 & 2
Answer Q 3 – 7
Prepare orders Prepare orders

Deliver orders Deliver orders Receive orders
Conduct Estimate
Section Commander’s ⅓
Prepare orders
Deliver Orders
Section Battle Prep
Section kit inspec-

tions
Platoon Sgt’s kit Platoon Sgt’s kit

inspections inspections
Critical/Op Critical/Op
Critical/Op Specific
Specific kit Specific kit
kit inspections
inspections inspections
Op Time
Op Time
Noisy rehearsals Noisy rehearsals Noisy rehearsals
Silent rehearsals Silent rehearsals Silent rehearsals
Conceptual Conceptual Conceptual

rehearsals rehearsals rehearsals
2-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
NOTES
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-5

2-6
Company Level Time Analysis
Time
Event
Weather
Sun/Moon
Red forces
Black forces
Green forces
White
PLANNING
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF

`
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Time Now Op Starts (incl. moves) Total Time avail 1/3 (incl. orders) : 2/3 Planning Time Orders complete
Activity Prep ROOB/Read Q1-3 Q4-6 Wargame Q7 Orders (incl. rehearsal)
% for each activity Fixed (max 5%) 25% 20% 10% 15% 25%
PLANNING
Time allocation 10 min 10 min
Real time start / finish / / / / / / /

2-7
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-8
7 QUESTIONS OVERVIEW Q2 - What have I been told to Q3 - What effects to I need to achieve Q4 - Where and how can I
do and why? & what direction must I give to develop best accomplish each effect?
Q1 - What is the situation and 1. What is my superior the plan? Each effect should be
how does it affect me? commander’s intent and what An effect is something you need to considered in priority order
Ground is my part in his plan? achieve on the enemy in order to be to determine where and how
• Observation & Fields of Fire 2. What tasks are specified and successful. it can best be achieved. All
• Cover and Concealment what tasks are implied? Given a mission to destroy an enemy, aspects of each effect must
• Obstacles common effects at plt level might be find, be considered in full so that a
• Key Terrain 3. What constraints are imposed plan/s is produced for each.
upon me? suppress, destroy, protect and neutralise.
• Avenues of Approach • Vital Gd
4. How might the situation change Avoid using effects terms that are too
What are the enemy’s general. Ensure they are achievable • Key Terrain
capabilities? and how could this affect me? • Killing areas
within available resources. Identify a
• Tactics / Doctrine Weapons, Gives Situation FF - purpose for each effect. • Infrastructure
Arcs & Eqpt send WARNO • FUPs
• Obstacles, Type of position, DFs Gives Intent and ME
Gives SoM
• Air/aviation threat, ISR, CBRN
capability Q5 - What resources are Q6 - When and where do the actions
• Morale needed to accomplish each take place in relation to each other? Q7 - What control measures
• Strs and weaknesses effect? Co-ord the actions of all manoeuvre, direct do I need to impose?
• Key vulnerabilities Allocate troops and resources and indirect fire sp in time and space. • Routes • FSCM
to each of the selected effects / • Prelim ops • Axis • Combat ID
What are the enemy’s
tasks incl Res • All mov timings • Boundaries • Orders /

intentions in my area?
Manpower – Firepower - Logistics • Direct and indirect fireplan • Report Lines signals for
• Most likely COA (Plan for) • Other friendly force actions • LOE switching fire
Do you need to ask for
• Most dangerous COA (Prep Use timeline / sync matrix
anything else?
contingencies for) Gives Coords – control
Gives Msns & Tasks & Pris Gives Coords - timings, prelims, locs,
Gives Ground and Situation EF measures
fireplan

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
THE COMBAT ESTIMATE (7 QUESTIONS)
Q1. WHAT IS THE SITUATION AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT ME? DEDUCTION OUTPUT/PRODUCT
Battlefield Area Evaluation Human Terrain Threats • Key vulnerabilities • Ground Prelims
• Most likely COA • Situation
• Obstacles ● Routes • Area • Strength • Most dangerous COA • Enemy Forces
• Cover ● Objectives • Structures • Weapons +

• Named Areas of Interest (NAIs) • Other protagonists/
• Observation ● Boundaries • Capabilities Equipment actors
• Key Terrain ● Timings • Organisation • Arcs
• Approaches • People (men, • Tactics/Doctrine
women and • Type of Posn/
children) Objectives
• Events • Intentions/Morale
Q2. WHAT HAVE I BEEN TOLD TO DO AND WHY? (Msn Analysis) DEDUCTION OUTPUT/PRODUCT
PLANNING
Q2.1. Higher Comds’ Intent: • Likely missions, tasks and • Situation

• 2-up Intent (and wider if necessary/relevant) priorities • Friendly Forces
• 1-up Mission, Intent, SoM, ME • CONPLAN options • Priority Intelligence
Requirements
My Mission • Issue Warning Order
Q2.2. Specified tasks and implied tasks
• What must I do on the objective? ● What must I do concurrently?

• What must I do after? ● What must I do to support others?
• What do I need other to do for me?
Q2.3. Identify Freedom and Constraints
2-9
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-10
Q2.4.
• How might the situation change and how might it effect me?
• Where are the risks?
• How can I mitigate/protect/exploit?
How might the situation change and how could this affect me?
Q3. WHAT EFFECTS DO I NEED TO ACHIEVE AND WHAT

DEDUCTION OUTPUT/PRODUCT
DIRECTION MUST I GIVE IN ORDER TO DEVELOP THE PLAN?
Intent Statement and Effect Schematic • For each effect identify a • Intent
An effect is the desired change as a consequence of an action. It should describe the purpose • Main Effort
changed circumstances to the enemy, target group or the environment.
(Endorsed effects are listed on page 2-14
PLANNING
Q4. WHERE AND HOW CAN I BEST ACCOMPLISH EACH EFFECT? DEDUCTION OUTPUT/PRODUCT
Consider Select CoA (Tactical Functions) • Identify action(s) reqd to • Outline SoM
• Vital Ground ● Key Terrain • C2 ● Info and Int achieve each effect
• Infrastructure ● Potential FUPs • Firepower ● Manoeuvre • Location from which to deliver
• Potential KAs • Protection ● CSS action(s) (eg site Beaten Zone
then site Firing Point)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Q5. WHAT RESOURCES ARE NEEDED TO ACCOMPLISH EACH
EFFECT?
Troops to Task • All Arms Assets • Who/What will best achieve the • Outline Pl/Sect/Atts
• Troops • Coalition Assets action? missions, tasks and

• Integral Weapons • Host Nation Support (Mil and Civ) • Do I have enough resources? priorities
• Support Weapons • OGDs (plan sequential or simultaneous • Sum of subordinates’
• Specialist Equipment • NGOs actions) unifying purposes
• CSS • Contractors • Subordinate resource allocation must add up to my
SoM
Q6. WHEN AND WHERE DO THE ACTIONS TAKE PLACE IN

RELATION TO EACH OTHER?
PLANNING
Synchronise • Refine SoM, mission, tasks and • Coord Instructions -

• Synchronise own assets and understand where ● Timeline/Synchronisation priorities Timings, prelims, locs
all support assets are acting in relation to each other. Matrix and fireplan
• Synch Matrix
Q7. WHAT CONTROL MEASURES DO I NEED TO IMPOSE? DEDUCTION OUTPUT/PRODUCT

• Boundaries ● Objectives ● Routes ● SP/RP ● Axis • How can I control and simplify • Coord Instructions -
• BM ● LoE ● Limit for Recce ● STAP ● Report Lines my plan? Control measures
• Coord Points ● NTM ● ROE ● Bypass/Denial ● CPERS
• EMCON ● COMSEC ● OPSEC ● Combat ID ● Civilians
2-11
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
GROUND ANALYSIS
Used for general analysis of the terrain in the area of interest to
increase understanding. Detailed analysis of terrain as part of the
estimate process should use the pneumonic OCOKA (see p.2-5).
G - General Relief and Grain

R - Re-entrants and Roads
O - Observation Points
U - Undergrowth and Cover
N - Severely Restricted / Restricted
D - Dead Ground / Darkness / Limited Visibility
IPE
• CCIR - Comd’s Critical Information Requirement.
• PIR - Priority Information Requirement.
• FFIR - Friendly Forces Information Requirement.
• EEFI - Essential Elements of Friendly Intention.
• HVT (High Value Target) - Loss of which significantly damages
the enemy’s capability to achieve his intentions.
• HPTL (High Priority Target List) - Those HVTs the loss of which
would contribute most to the enemy’s defeat and which can be
attacked given the ISTAR.
• NAI (Named Areas of Interest) - Area/Point along a particular AA
through which an enemy activity is expected to occur. Activity/lack of
activity will help to confirm/deny a particular COA.
• TAI (Target Area of Interest) - Points/Lines where a commander
intends to target the threat in order to achieve a specified effect.
• DP/DL (Decision Point/Line) - Points in time and space at which
the commander has to make a decision to trigger an action in a
particular TAI. Allowance must be made for the reaction time of the
systems to achieve the required effect.
2-12 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
RISK MANAGEMENT
Probability of an event x Impact of that event = Risk
Seizing the Initiative - Taking Risks

Military success comes through the identification of when to
take decisive risks, not from a mindset that avoids them.
Risk is an expression of the probability and implications of an
activity or event, with positive or negative consequences, taking
place. The acceptance of risk presents real opportunities as well
as the potential for grave consequences. Commanders must
therefore decide between taking calculated risks and leaving
things to chance.
• About understanding, balancing and taking risks rather than
avoiding hazards.
• What are the probabilities of the different likely eventualities?
What effect will they have on your mission, your higher
commander’s plan, or for your troops?
• About positive consequences (opportunities) as much as it
is about negative.
• Understand the environment. A sound combat estimate will
identify and assess opportunities and risks.
• Sometimes, the more you try to reduce risks, the more they
may actually increase.
• Just because it worked last time, doesn’t mean that it will
work this time.
• The mission is the priority, take risks if they are worth it
to achieve the mission and do what you can to limit the
consequences if it all goes wrong.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-13

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Planning for Risk

Commanders must consider the risks to their plan throughout the
Estimate process (specifically at Questions 1 and 2) and during the
execution of the plan. Based on their analysis of the Risks, they
should then decide how best to deal with them.
• Identify Risks. Enemy threats or other hazards (environmental,
resource limitations, etc), as identified in Question 1.
• Assess probability and impact of the event. If both are high,
then that option is extremely high risk, if both are low then the
risk is low.
• Decide Ownership of the Risk. Who holds responsibility for
deciding whether that risk is acceptable or not? If not owned by
you, do you have delegated authority (specified or implied), or
can you seek dispensation or waiver to take the risk yourself.
• Understanding the Commander’s Intent (Question 2). If the
immediate mission (in which troops are in contact) cannot be
achieved without taking a certain and unacceptable risk can the
mission be achieved in another way?
• Reduce, mitigate, or exploit the risk. Choose from the
following:
• Terminate. Change the plan so the risk is eliminated.
• Treat. Reduce likelihood, or mitigate likely adverse outcomes
to reduce impact for example this may involve increasing or
decreasing what equipment is carried/worn.
• Tolerate. A Comd may decide to tolerate the risk without
treatment. At the junior level, where the risk exceeds toler-
ance further clarification with the 1-up Comd is required.
• Transfer. Where a risk cannot be treated, and a Comd is
unwilling to tolerate it, he may seek to transfer the risk else-
where, or up the chain of comd, normally on the authority of
the 1-up Comd.
• Take. Where an opportunity exists, the Comd may choose
to seize it: where possible a discussion should be had with
the 1-up Comd. If it cannot does taking that risk fall within
his intent?
• Constantly re-assess risks.
(See SOHB 3.9-5 for more info)
2-14 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

COMMAND AND CONTROL RELATIONSHIPS
Ser Authority OPCOM OPCON TACOM TACON
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Assign separate employment of components of assigned FEs X

2 Assign missions (1) X X
3 Reassign forces X
4 Delegate OPCON X
5 Delegate TACON X X
6 Deploy units X X
PLANNING
7 Assign tasks (2) X X X
Direct and control movements or manoeuvres necessary to accomplish the

8 X X X X
subordinate comd’s assigned missions ortasks
Notes:
(1) AAP-6 defines a mission as a “clear, concise statement of the task of the command and its purpose”.
(2) AAP-6 does not define a task. Within the context of C2 states, tasks are undertaken within (and are subordinate to) the subordinate FE’s
mission. Tasks are usually limited by function, time or location.
2-15
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
The commander needs to select what will be decisive to his mission

and how to achieve it. At the tactical level, ‘what a commander is
to achieve’ is given to him in his mission. The mission should be
described in terms of tasks, written as Actions or Effects, with a
unifying purpose. Since ‘what he is to achieve’ is given to him, ‘how
he intends to achieve it’ is at the core of his own decision-making.
It requires him to select an action that would be decisive, together
with the remaining actions necessary to achieve the intended effect
and outcome. Whilst the intent will be generated after Mission
Analysis (After Q3) the Scheme of Manoeuvre will necessarily
follow later, once the plan has been developed (Q4 - Q7).
‘How he intends to achieve it’ will normally be through a combination
of actions to be undertaken by subordinates - what they are to
achieve, where and when.
WRITING MISSION STATEMENTS

• Must contain Task and Purpose:
• The Purpose should be considered first - the WHY; what is
the reason for executing the mission?
• The Task is the WHAT you have to do to achieve the
Mission.
• Your subordinate then works out the HOW bounded by your
coordinating instructions.
• Three types of Mission Statement:
• Single task.
• Multiple task.
• Includes a list of tasks - often allocated to reserves as a
Be Prepared To (BPT) and must each have an In Order To
(IOT).
• Multiple Mission statements each with its own Task and
Purpose.
• Check list for crafting Mission Statements:
• Do they contain a Task and Purpose?
• Does the sum of the purposes add up to the Scheme of
Manoeuvre?
• Are they unambiguous?
• Do they use the defined Effect, Action and Task Verb
language?
• Have you covered all the essential Tasks identified?
• Do they fall logically out of the CONOPS?
• Do they bear out Mission Analysis by subordinates?
• Do they bear out intended freedom of action?
• Do subordinates have the resources to carry out the
assigned Mission Statement?
• Missions should be listed in logical order of activity.
2-16 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
Having conducted the estimate the commander must communicate
the plan. The CONOPS comprises 3 elements:
• Intent Statement. Intent is similar to purpose; it represents
what the commander wants to achieve and why. It should be
expressed using objectives, effects, and desired outcomes.
The complexity of operations demands a short and clear intent.
The best intents are clear to subordinates and should contain
only the essential detail.
• Scheme of Manoeuvre (SoM). The SoM explains the intent
and describes how the commander sees his operation working.
It explains where, when and how the force is to achieve its
purpose, so that subordinates can understand their roles in the
plan and the effects that they are to have.
• Main Effort (ME). The ME is the activity that the commander
considers critical to the success of the mission. It must be
properly resourced. The ME ensures that, when the situation
becomes more confusing, troops can focus their efforts
according to the plan.
COMMANDER’S BACKBRIEF
The commander’s backbrief is delivered to the commander or
senior officer to demonstrate understanding and compliance with
direction received. A suggested format for the brief follows:
Serial Title
1 Confirmation of Mission
2 Main deductions from the estimate
3 CONOPS:
• Intent to include Effects
• SoM to likely Missions/Tasks
• Consideration of the higher HQ plan (one up, 2 up),
• Main Effort
4 Key Coordinating Instructions -

timings, resources, preliminary moves
5 • Questions/RFIs/points of clarification to superior

commander. Identify constraints; request for assets
• Key resource shortfalls
• Indicate impact on operations
• Areas of concern
• Key risks
• Short Summary
6 Questions from superior commander.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-17

2-18
EFFECTS
Note: Effects annotated with an asterisk (*) are UK only verbs.
Ser Term Definition Tactical Graphic

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Block Deny enemy access to a given area, or to The head of the “T” faces enemy
prevent his advance in a particular direction. forces.
(STANAG 2287)
Block is also an Obstacle Effect that integrates The enemy advanced along the
the planning and obstacle effort to stop an stem of the T and is blocked at the
attacker along a specific avenue of approach head.
or to turn him from passing through an engage-
ment area. (APP-6(C)).
2 Canalise3 Restrict enemy movement to a narrow zone. The opening defines the span of
PLANNING
(STANAG 2287) the canalization and faces enemy

forces.
3 Clear4 Remove all enemy forces and eliminate The arrows point toward enemy
organized resistance in an assigned area. forces.
(APP-6(C))
4 Coerce Use force or the threat of force or other potentially prejudicial means to persuade an individual or group(s) to adopt a
certain pattern of behaviour against his wishes. (AJP-3.10)
5 Compel Force, through kinetic or non-kinetic action, a group or individual to undertake a desired course of action. (AJP-3.10)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
6 Contain Restrict the freedom of manoeuvre of an en- The opening typically faces enemy

emy force to a specified area. (STANAG 2287) forces.
7 Convince Bring to belief, consent, or a course of action. (AJP-3.10)
8 Cover Provide security for the main force by inter- The arrowheads may touch other
cepting, engaging, delaying, disorganizing, graphics that define the limits of
deceiving the enemy, while also observing and the task.
reporting information, before he can attack,
PLANNING
observe or defend. Operate independently of

main force. (STANAG 2287)
9 Deceive Mislead the enemy by manipulation, distortion,

or falsification of evidence to induce him to
react in a manner prejudicial to his interests.

(AAP-6)
10 Defeat* Diminish the effectiveness of the enemy to the extent that he is unable or unwilling to participate further in the battle or at
least cannot fulfil his mission. (DN 11/17)
2-19
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-20
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
11 Delay Prevent an enemy force arriving at a specified The arrow points in the direction of
location either: for a specified length of time; the action. The tip of the arrowhead
or until a specified time or event. Measure: may indicate the location where the
enemy slowed to comply with time/space action is to conclude. The unit’s cur-
criteria. (APP-6(C)) rent location is typically represented
at the base of the arc. Inclusion of a
DTG above the ‘D’ specifies ‘Delay
Until DTG’.
12 Deny Prevent enemy use of a specified thing. The opening will be on the friendly
(STANAG 2287) side of the graphic.
PLANNING
13 Destroy Damage an object or an enemy force so that it The graphic is typically centered
is rendered useless to the enemy until recon- over the desired location.
stituted. (STANAG 2287)
14 Destabilise* Render an individual or group(s) unstable or create the conditions for collapse. (DN 11/17)
15 Deter* Discourage an individual or group(s) from carrying out a certain action by convincing them that the consequences of
their actions outweigh the potential gains. (JDP 0-01)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
16 Develop* Advance friendly force capability and competence (DN 11/17)
17 Discredit* Damage the credit or reputation of an individual or group(s). (DN 11/17)

18 Disengage* Break engagement in preparation for eventual withdrawal. (DN 11/17)
19 Dislocate* Deny an individual or group(s) the ability to bring strength(s) to bear, or to persuade that strength is irrelevant. (DN
11/17)
20 Disrupt Break apart an enemy’s formation and tempo, The arrows typically point toward
interrupt the enemy timetable, cause prema- enemy forces.
ture and/or piecemeal commitment of forces.
(STANAG 2287)
PLANNING
Disrupt is also an Obstacle Effect that focuses The arrows point in the direction
Fire Planning and Obstacle Effort to cause the of enemy advance and show the
enemy to break up its formation and tempo, physical disruption of forces
interrupt his timetable, commit breaching

assets prematurely and attack in a piecemeal

effort. (APP-6(C)).
21 Divert* Draw attention from the point of the principal activity, in so doing masking the intended operation or draw forces down a
route or direction of own choosing. (DN 11/17)
22 Empower* Promote confidence, authority, accountability and responsibility in an individual or group(s). (DN 11/17). Consider role of
indigenous women in post-conflict negotiation and in stabilisation activity such as SSR and DDR.
2-21
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-22
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
23 Exploit Exploitation. An offensive operation that usu- The arrow points in the direction of
ally follows a successful attack and is designed the action. The tip of the arrowhead
to disorganise the enemy in depth. (AAP-6) may indicate the location where
the action is to conclude. The unit’s
projected location would be at the
base of the symbol.
24 Find* Detect, Recognise, Identify and/or Locate a unit, object, activity, situation, event or individual or group(s). (DN 11/17)
25 Fix Prevent an enemy from moving any part of his The arrow points toward the enemy
forces from a specified location for a specified forces.
period of time. (APP-6(C))
PLANNING
Fix is also an Obstacle Effect that focuses The arrow shows the direction of
fire planning and obstacle effort to slow an enemy advance.
attacker’s movement within a specified area,
normally an engagement area. (APP-6(C))
26 Guard Protect the main force by fighting to gain time, The arrowheads may touch other
while also observing and reporting information. graphics that define the limits of
Operate within fire support range of main force. the task.
(STANAG 2287)
27 Hold* Maintain possession by direct or indirect means. (DN 11.17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
28 Interdict Keep an enemy force out of range so that it The graphic is typically centred over
cannot be used effectively against a friendly the desired location.

force. (STANAG 2287)
29 Isolate Seal off an enemy force from its sources of The opening will be on the friendly
support, to deny it freedom of movement, side of the graphic.
and prevent it from having contact with other
enemy forces. (STANAG 2287)
30 Neutralise Render an enemy element temporarily The graphic is typically centered

PLANNING
incapable of interfering with the operation. over the desired location.

(STANAG 2287)
31 Prevent Keep from happening, avert. (AJP-3.10) This should include the prevention
of, and protection from, criminal acts
32 Protect* Prevent the enemy, environment or disease from having effect on an individual such as sexual and gender-based
or group(s). (DN 11/17). violence.
33 Reassure Restore confidence or dispel fear. (AJP-3.10)
2-23
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-24
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
34 Secure Gain possession of a position or terrain fea- The opening will be on the friendly
ture, with or without force, and to make such side of the graphic.
disposition as will prevent its destruction or
loss to enemy action. (STANAG 2287)
Secure (mil task). In an operational context, to
gain possession of a position or terrain feature,
with or without force, and to make such dis-
position as will prevent, as far as possible, its
destruction or loss by enemy action. (AAP-6)
35 Seize Clear a designated area and obtain control of The arrowhead identifies the loca-
it. (STANAG 2287) tion to be seized, and the circle
identifies the unit(s) assigned the
PLANNING
task.
36 Shape Cause to conform to a particular form or pattern. (AJP-3.10)
37 Stabilise* Impose security and control over an area while employing military capabilities to restore services and support civilian
agencies. (DN 11/17)
38 Support* Aid, complement or sustain another force, individual, or group(s). (DN 11/17)
39 Undermine* Damage or weaken the authority or reputation of an individual or group. (DN 11/17)
40 Understand* Develop knowledge, intent and context of a unit, object, activity, situation, event or individual or group(s). (DN 11/17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Note: Actions annotated with an asterisk (*) are UK only verbs.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Advance To An offensive operation designed to gain or re- The arrowhead typically points

Contact establish contact with the enemy. (AAP-6) toward enemy forces.
2 Advise* Counsel and inform of the implications of adopting a certain pattern of behaviour, beliefs or attitudes. (DN 11/17)
Advisor. Someone who can recommend a course of action, offer advice or inform another party about a fact or situation.
(JDN 6/11)
3 Ambush A surprise attack by fire from concealed posi- Orientation is determined by the
PLANNING
tions on a moving or temporarily halted enemy. anchor points. The back side of the
(APP-6(C)) graphic encompasses the ambush
position with the arrowhead shaft
positioned at the centre of mass,
while the arrowhead points in the
direction of fire.
4 Arrest To seize and hold a person under the authority The graphic is typically centered
of the law. (STANAG 2287) over the desired location.
2-25
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-26
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
5 Assault* Climax of an attack; closing with the enemy in hand to hand fighting. Short, violent attack, against local objective. (DN
11/17)
6 Assess Pose a judgement after comparing measured performances against a standard. (AJP-3.10)
7 Attack Take offensive action against a specified objec- The arrowhead typically points
tive. (STANAG 2287) toward enemy forces.
PLANNING
A double arrowhead denotes the

main attack with single arrowheads
denoting supporting attacks.
8 Attack By Engage an enemy with direct fires, supported Orientation is determined by the
Fire by indirect fires, without closing with him. anchor points. The back side of the
(STANAG 2287) graphic encompasses the firing po-
sition, while the arrowhead typically
points at the target.

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
9 Breach Break through or secure passage through The opening defines the span of the
an enemy defence, obstacle, or fortification. breach and faces enemy forces.
(STANAG 2287)

10 Break Out* Continuation of a crossing operation once the force has consolidated in the bridge head; or offensive action by an encir-
cled force to link-up with a main force. (DN 11/17)
11 Build Up* Attain prescribed strength of units and prescribed levels of vehs, eqpt, stores and supplies. (DN 11/17)
12 Bypass Manoeuvre around an obstacle, position, or The opening defines the span of the
enemy force to maintain the momentum of bypass and faces enemy forces.
PLANNING
advance. (STANAG 2287)
13 Capture Gain possession of specified enemy person- The arrowhead identifies the loca-
nel, materiel or information. (STANAG 2287) tion of the object to be captured,
and the circle identifies the unit(s)

assigned the task.
14 Collect Assemble, accumulate or acquire data or information. (AJP-3.10)
2-27
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-28
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
15 Confirm* Provide current information of previously reporting within a specified degree of certainty and/or accuracy. (DN 11/17)
16 Control Maintain physical influence over a specified The opening will be on the friendly
area to prevent its use by an enemy. (STANAG side of the graphic.
2287)
17 Coordinate Bring functions, systems or entities operating in the same environment in proper relation in order to avoid counter-
productive results such as duplication of effort or mutually-negating actions. (AJP-3.10)
18 Counterat- Attack against an enemy attacking force. The arrowhead points toward
tack (STANAG 2287) enemy forces.
PLANNING
19 Counterat- Attack against an enemy attacking force using The arrowhead points toward
fires. enemy forces.
tack By Fire
Note: This is a method of counterattack. .
(APP-6(C))
20 Cross* Deliberate or hasty: pass over or through an obstacle. (DN 11/17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
21 Cross-Cue* Pre-planned collaborative detection, recognition, identification, location or tracking; the deliberate handover of a collec-
tion/find task to a nominated unit, system or person. (DN 11/17)

22 Defend* Defeat or deter a threat to provide circumstances for maintaining or regaining the initiative. Depending on what size of
formation/unit is defending, defence can include delay, hold, deny and attack. (DN 11/17)
23 Degrade Reduce the effectiveness or efficiency. (Should be quantified) (AJP-3.10)
24 Demonstrate Deceive the enemy by making a show of force The arrow points in the direction of
without seeking contact. (STANAG 2287) the action. The tip of the arrowhead
may indicate the location where the
action is to conclude. The unit’s cur-
rent location is typically represented
PLANNING
at the base of the symbol.
25 Deploy* Move forces within areas of operation; position forces into a formation for battle, relocate forces to desired areas of
operations. (DN 11/17)
26 Designate* By visual or other means, indicate a target to a designated unit, object, activity, situation, event or person(s). (DN 11/17)
27 Detect* Discover the presence or absence of a unit, object, activity, situation, event or person(s) of significance. (JDP 0-01)
28 Diminish Reduce the effectiveness of an activity. (Similar to degrade, without the lethal overtones). (AJP-3.10)
2-29
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-30
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
29 Disengage * Break contact with the enemy in a delay or The arrow points in the direction of
withdrawal. (DN 11/17) the action. The tip of the arrowhead
at the base of the arc.
30 Educate* An activity to teach the benefits or consequences of patterns behaviour. (DN 11/17)
31 Emphasise* Add further credibility or information which will enhance effects of existing ops and further develop key messages and
themes. (DN 11/17)
PLANNING
32 Enable* Provide means, conditions or authority to make possible. (DN 11/17)
33 Encircle* Surround and isolate lines of communication resulting in loss of freedom of movement. (DN 11/17)
34 Encourage* Stimulate to respond in the desired manner. (DN 11/17)
35 Envelop Pass around or over the enemy’s defensive The arrow points in the direction of
position to secure objectives to enemy’s rear. the action. The tip of the arrowhead
(APP-6(C)) may indicate the location where the
at the beginning of the straight line.

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
36 Escort Accompany and protect [another force of The escort symbol appears above
convoy]. (STANAG 2287) the convoy or escorted unit’s

Note: Symbol is normally used in conjunction symbol.
with convoy symbol.
37 Establish* Set up a capability (particularly Med but also Log). (DN 11/17)
38 Exfiltrate Withdraw through or around enemy positions he arrow points in the direction
without detection. (STANAG 2287) of friendly forces. The tip of the
arrowhead may indicate the location
where the action is to conclude.
PLANNING
39 Expose Make visible, reveal something undesirable or injurious. (AJP-3.10)
40 Extract* Recover reconnaissance, stay-behind or encircled forces out of contact with the enemy. (DN 11/17)
Deceive the enemy by seeking contact but

41 Feint
avoiding a decisive engagement. (APP-6(C))
2-31
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-32
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
42 Follow and Follow a force conducting an offensive opera-

Assume tion, and be prepared to continue the mission
if the lead force is fixed, or otherwise unable to
continue. (APP-6(C))
43 Follow and Follow and support a lead force conducting an

Support offensive operation. (APP-6(C))
44 Frighten* Force or drive somebody or something away through fear. (DN 11/17)
45 Hand-Over* Pass responsibility for the conduct of operations from one force to another. (DN 11/17)
46 Harass* Fire designed to disturb the rest of the enemy, limit movement and, by threat of losses, lower morale. (DN 11/17)
PLANNING
47 Identify* Determine, the status (including friendly or hostile nature) of the detected unit, object, activity, situation, event or
person(s). (JDP 0-01)
48 Induce* Persuade or cause an audience to believe as true. (DN 11/17)
49 Infiltrate Move as individuals or groups over, through The arrow points in the direction
or around enemy positions without detection. of enemy forces. The tip of the
(DN 11/17) arrowhead may indicate the location
where the action is to conclude.
50 Influence* Persuade – usually covertly. (JDP 0-01)
51 Inform Impart information or knowledge. (AJP-3.10)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
52 Insert* Deploy reconnaissance, stay-behind or raiding forces out of contact with the enemy. (DN 11/17)

53 Intercept* Search for and listen to and/or record communications and/or electronic data. (DN 11/17)
54 Liaise* Maintain contact or intercommunication between elements of military forces to ensure mutual understanding and unity or
purpose and action. (DN 11/17)
55 Link-Up* Establishment of contact, in enemy controlled territory, between one or more friendly units or formations which have the
same or differing missions. (DN 11/17)
56 Locate Determine the position of a specified thing. The opening will be on the friendly
PLANNING
(STANAG 2287) side of the graphic.
57 Manipulate* Manage to advantage (person or situation). (JDP 0-01)

58 Manoeuvre* Employ forces on the battlefield (using movement) in combination with fire or fire potential to achieve a position of
advantage in respect to the opposition in order to accomplish the mission. (DN 11/17)
59 Mark* Call for fire on a specific location to orient the observer/spotter or to indicate targets. (DN 11/17)
60 Mask* Obscure from an individual or group’s observation. (DN 11/17)
2-33
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-34
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
61 Mentor* Develop capacity through example and/or advice through planning and preparation, execution and lessons captured /
AAR phases. (DN 11/17)
An experienced and trusted adviser who provides counsel and leadership to another person, or organisation, by agree-
ment. (JDN 6/11)
62 Mislead Create a false perception that leads someone to act in a manner detrimental to mission accomplishment while benefiting
accomplishment of friendly objectives. (AJP-3.10)
63 Monitor* Develop or maintain situational awareness, pattern of life or atmospherics of a geographical area, activity or situation.
(DN 11/17)
64 Occupy Position a unit in a specified area without The opening will be on the friendly
enemy opposition. (STANAG 2287) side of the graphic.
PLANNING
65 Organise* Give orderly structure to. (JDP 0-01)
66 Overthrow* Remove forcibly from power. (JDP 0-01)

67 Partner* Partnering. An approach to relationship building [usually with an indigenous force] through direct assistance and shared
endeavour that creates the right conditions, spirit and capabilities to achieve a formal and enduring strategic partnership.
(JDN 6/11)
68 Patrol* Move tactically within an area of responsibility to deliver a clearly defined effect(s). A patrol is conducted in an area
where an enemy threat precludes normal administrative movement. (DN 11/17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
69 Passage of Move forward or rearward through another force’s combat positions with the intention of moving into or out of contact
Lines* with the enemy. (DN 11/17)
70 Penetrate Break through enemy defence and disrupt the The arrow points toward enemy

defensive system. (STANAG 2287) forces.
71 Permit* Give permission or consent; allow something to happen. (DN 11/17)
72 Promote* Advocating or advance awareness of an individual, organisation and/or courses of action. (DN 11/17)
73 Pursue Catch or cut off a hostile force attempting to The arrow points in the direction of
escape, with the aim of destroying it. (STANAG the action. The unit’s current loca-
PLANNING
2287) tion is typically represented at the

base of the line.
NB: Pursuit - An offensive operation designed
to catch or cut off a hostile force attempting to
escape, with the aim of destroying it. (AAP-6)
74 Raid An operation, usually small scale, involving a

swift penetration of hostile territory to secure
information, confuse the enemy, or destroy his
installations. It ends with a planned withdrawal
upon completion of the assigned mission.
(APP-6(B))
2-35
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-36
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
75 Recce A mission undertaken to obtain, by visual observation or other detection methods, information about the activities and re-
sources of an enemy or potential enemy, or to secure data concerning the meteorological, hydrographic, or geographic
characteristics of a particular area. (AAP-06)
76 Recce by Fire A method of reconnaissance in which fire is placed on a suspected enemy position to cause the enemy to disclose his
presence by movement or return of fire. (AAP-06)
77 Recce in An offensive operation designed to discover and/or test the enemy's strength or to obtain other information. (AAP-06)
Force
78 Recognise* Classify the capability of the unit, person(s), object, event, situation or activity, of potential military significance. (DN
11/17)
79 Reconcile* Restore friendly relations between people; make apparently incompatible groups able to exist together without problems
PLANNING
or conflict. (DN 11/17)
80 Reconstitute* Expand force structures and infrastructure beyond existing levels, including the raising of new units and formations and
the expansion of industrial capacity to support the procurement of equipment and stocks. (DN 11/17)
81 Recover Extract a friendly force element or materiel The arrowhead identifies the loca-
from a location not under friendly control, with tion of the element or material to be
or without force. (STANAG 2287) recovered, and the circle identifies

the unit(s) assigned the task.
82 Redeploy* Return to original or other position having deployed. (DN 11/17)
83 Reinforce* Strengthen in place forces with additional personnel or equipment. (DN 11/17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
84 Relief In An operation in which, by direction of higher The unit being relieved is typically
Place (RiP) authority, all or part of a unit is replaced in an located at the base of the curve,
area by the incoming unit. The responsibili- and the unit performing the relief is
ties of the replaced elements for the mission typically located at the end of the

and the assigned zone of operations are symbol. The arrowhead typically
transferred to the incoming unit. The incom- points to the location the relieved
ing unit continues the operation as ordered. unit should move to.
(APP-6(C))
85 Rescue* Save or set free a group or individual(s). (DN 11/17)
86 Resupply* Provide with or obtain a fresh supply to maintain required levels. (DN 11/17)
87 Retain Keep possession of a terrain feature to The opening will be on the friendly
PLANNING
ensure it is free of enemy occupation or use. side of the graphic.

(STANAG 2287)
88 Retire Move a force, out of contact, away from the The arrow points in the direction of
enemy. (STANAG 2287) the action. The tip of the arrowhead
Note: Retirement (mil task). An operation in may indicate the location where the
which a force out of contact moves away from action is to conclude. The unit’s cur-
the enemy. (AAP-6) rent location is typically represented
at the base of the arc.
2-37
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-38
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
89 Scout* Task of actively seeking info on the enemy, ground and other relevant detail in sp of the commander’s plan. (DN 11/17)
90 Screen Observe, identify, and report information on The arrowheads may touch other
threats to the main force. Only fight in self- graphics that define the limits of
protection. (STANAG 2287) the task.
91 Search* Locate specific targets using intelligence assessments, systematic procedures and appropriate detection techniques.
(DN 11/17)
92 Strike* Inflict damage on, seize or destroy an objective or threat. (JDP 0-01)
93 Support By Engage the enemy by direct fire in support of The back side of the graphic en-
Fire another manoeuvring force. (STANAG 2287) compasses the firing position, while
PLANNING
the arrowheads typically indicate

the arc of coverage that the firing
position is meant to support.
94 Suppress Temporarily degrade an enemy capability to The graphic is typically centered

enable a friendly action. (STANAG 2287) over the desired location.
95 Take-Over* Accept responsibility from another force for the conduct of operations.
96 Target* Make the object of an operation. (DN 11/17)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
97 Track* Note: “A target [noun] is any structure, object, person, organisation, mindset, thought process, attitude or behaviour
which can be influenced...” (JSP 900, dated 2009).

98 Turn Force an enemy from one direction of advance The rear of the graphic identifies
to another. (STANAG 2287) the enemy’s location and the arrow
points in the direction the obstacle
should force the enemy to turn.
Is also an Obstacle Effect that integrates fire Direction of the arrow indicates the
planning and obstacle effort to drive an enemy desired direction of turn.
formation from one avenue of approach to
an adjacent avenue of approach or into an
PLANNING
engagement area.
99 Warn* Pre-planned provision of information to provide warning of a specified situation, event or activity. (DN 11/17)
100 Withdraw Disengage from the enemy and move in a di- The arrow points in the direction of
rection away from the enemy. (STANAG 2287) the action. The tip of the arrowhead
101 Withdraw Disengage from the enemy while under pres- action is to conclude. The unit’s cur-
Under Pres- sure and move in a direction away from the rent location is typically represented
sure enemy. at the base of the arc.
2-39
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
MAP MARKING
2-40 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
MAP MARKING
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-41

2-42
VEHICLE PLANNING DATA
Ser Armr/Inf AFVs Wpns Ammo Qty Wpn Range Crew Wt (kg) Max Speed MLC Range Road/ Mixed
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)
1 CR2 120mm APFSDS Maximum 1000m-2000m

49 Rounds
HESH 1500m-5000m 61,000- Range 454 km
4 56 kph 76
Smoke 5000m 63,000 road/256 km mixed
2 x 7.62 7.62 4200 Rounds 1100m
2 Scimitar 30mm APDS Maximum 1500m

FV 107 201 Rounds 6,800- Range 809 km
HE 3800m 3 80 kph 10
10,900 road/480 km mixed
PLANNING
1 x 7.62 7.62 3000 1100m
3 Warrior 30mm APDS Maximum 1500m

FV 510 219 Rounds 22,000- Range 500 km
HE 3800m 3+7 80 kph 30
25,000 road/240 km mixed
1 x 7.62 7.62 2200 Rounds 1100m
4 Mastiff HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m

23,000-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 2+8 90 kph 30 Range 600 km road?
26,000
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)
5 Ridgeback HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 2000m 2+5

18,000-

GMG HE N/A N/A 80 kph 25 Range 600 km road
20,000
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m
6 Jackal 2 HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800m-2000m 4

6,100-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 80 kph 8 Range 650 km road
7,200
7.62 7.62 1600 Rounds 1100m
7 Bulldog 7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m 2+8

18,000- 17-
PLANNING
52 kph Range 580 km road

21,000 19
FV 430
8 Panther HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m 2+2 5,900-

75 kph 8 Range 460 km road
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m 7,100
9 Coyote HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800m-2000m

6,500-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 3 80 kph 11 Range 500 km road
10,500
7.62 7.62 1600 Rounds 1100m
2-43
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-44
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)
10 Wolfhound HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m

20,000-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 2+2 75 kph 30 Range 600 km road
27,000
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m
11 Husky HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m

11,600-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 2+2 16 Range 600 km road
13,800
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m
PLANNING
12 R-WMIK HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m

2,900-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 4 6 Range 450 km road
4,100
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m
13 Foxhound HMG 50cal 200 Rounds 1800-2000m

7,100-
GMG HE 480 Rounds 2200m 2+4 9 Range 600 km road
8,700
7.62 7.62 1000 Rounds 1100m

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
B VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS (All data are for basic vehicles without additions unless otherwise stated).
MAM Dimensions (m) Load Capacities Fuel

Type Designation MLC
(kg) L W H Payload (kg) Crew Tank (l) Range (km)
Yamaha 450 Quad (not inc trl) 420 1 2.00 1.09 1.12 120 1 15 -

LR 90 TUL GS 2400 3 3.84 1.79 2.04 760 1+5 55 440
LR 110 TUM GS 3100 3 4.55 1.79 2.04 1380 1+7 82 640
Pinzgauer 4x4 TUM HD GS 3850 4 4.53 1.80 2.08 1400 1+7 82 860
Pinz 6x6 TUM HD GS 6X6 5070 7 5.12 2.06 2.86 1400 1+7 82 860
LR Twin Cab HEBE 3500 4 5.20 1.90 2.20 600 1+3 82 640
PLANNING
Ambulance BFA (LR Chassis) 3800 4 5.19 2.52 2.80 1170 1+1 82 640
Support Veh SV 6T 16660 19 8.10 2.55 3.07 6000 1+1 300 500
Support Veh SV 9T 23380 23 9.36 2.55 3.32 9000 1+1 400 500
Support Veh SV 15T 24190 23 10.55 2.55 3.35 15000 1+1 400 500
Recovery Veh SV R 30360 31 10.35 2.92 3.14 - 1+1 400 460

Unit Sp Tanker SV UST 22140 23 9.16 2.94 3.43 7000L 1+1 400 500
Palletised Load Sys SV EPLS 20660 38 10.56 3.14 3.38 15000 1+1 400 500
2-45
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-46
ARTILLERY PLANNING DATA
Maximum Planning Max Speed (Road)
Ser Arty Ammunition Wt (kg) MLC Range Road / Mixed
Range (m) Range (m) (Kph)
(a) (b) (c) (f) (h) (i)
(d) (e) (g)
1 AS90 HE
39 Cal Barrel 24,700m
(155mm) Smoke 19,500m 44,500 55 50 468 kms
Illuminating 24,200m
2 Lt Gun HE
PLANNING
(105mm) 17,200m
Smoke 15,000m 1,858 - -
Illuminating 15,700m
3 MLRS 84,000m
GMLRS-U 15-84km 25,000 64 480 kms
(M270B1) (Min 15,000m)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AIR DEFENCE PLANNING DATA

Air Defence Type of System Min Range Max Speed Range - Road/
Ser Max Range (m) Wt (kg) MLC
System (Missiles Carried) (m) (Road) Mixed
(a) (e) (f) (h)
(b) (c) (d) (g) (h)
1 HVM Close AD (20) 1500m 4500m (FGA) 12700 80 600

(SP and LML) 5500m (Stormer) 450
(hovering hels
and approaching ac)
2 Rapier FSC Area AD 500m 8200m Trailer 2123 Kg -

PLANNING
(Up to 45) (Cruise Missiles, Missile 89 Kg

UAVs, fixed and
24hr, all weather
rotary wing A/C) Tracker Radar
command guided 2443 Kg
missile system
comprising of Surv Radar
3 trailers 2138 Kg
2-47
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-48
ORGANIC ISTAR PLANNING DATA
Range Operated
Ser UAV System Endurance Wpns Sensors (ISTAR) Limitations UOR
(Radius) by/at
(a) (b) (d) (e) (f) (g) (i)
(c) (h)
1 T-HAWK (Hand 2km (LOS) 40mins Nil FMV EO or IR direct 20kts wind RE Talisman Yes
launched) feed to GCS 5-600ft AGL Tp/ Ptl level
2 DESERT 15km 60mins Nil FMV EO or IR direct 25kts wind 300-700 ft 3 man crew/ Yes
HAWK 3 (Hand (LOS) (Tactical) feed to GCS AGL Rain/Storms BG Level
launched)
3 WATCHKEEPER 140km 14hrs Nil Stab FMV EO/IR IR 45kts wind 3000m RA/Bde ISTAR Core
(Runway (LOS) Laser Tgt Marker Auto visibility Rain/Storms level
launched and Tracking Capability
landed)
PLANNING
4 REAPER 650nm 16hrs Hellfire Stab FMV EO/IR IR 10000-25000ft AGL RAF and Yes
(MQ-9) (Runway (Armed) (Armed) 114K2A Laser Tgt Marker and Rain/Storms USAF/
launched and 1000nm 22hrs GBU-12 Designator SAR Operational
landed) (Clean) (Clean) (500lb laser level
guided)
5 Black Hornet 600m 20 mins Nil Over-the-wall capability No night-time capabil- Combat Arms Yes
(LOS) in a contact situation ity and cannot be
operated indoors

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Range Operated
(Radius) by/at
(a) (b) (d) (e) (f) (g) (i)
(c) (h)
6 MQ 1 Predator N/A 18+ hrs on Up to 2 x EO/IR Speed: 120kts Non-organic N/A

stn Hellfire Real time FMV Weather over target.
Laser Tgt Designator UHF comms notori-
IR pointer ously bad.
7 H450 Max 14 hrs Nil EO/IR Speed 85kts UAS Bty Core
Range: FMV Weather over target.
150km Laser Marker No orientation on
(line of display.
sight). No UHF LOS comms.
PLANNING
8 Raptor N/A N/A Nil Can identify a tank- Imagery must be Non-organic Core
(as per (as per sized object at 27km analysed
GR4) GR4) stand-off Datalink from pod to
Sensor captures 30nm ground station has a
swathes of imagery 280km line of sight
(stills) limit
Oblique (side-looking)
imagery with stand-off
from target of 4-150km
Simultaneous EO and
IR image capture
2-49
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-50
Range Operated
(Radius) by/at
(a) (b) (d) (e) (f) (g) (i)
(c) (h)
9 Global Hawk N/A N/A Nil Synthetic Aperture Limited tactical Non-organic N/A
(never al- Radar (SAR) products
located for Moving Target Indicator
a specific (MTI)
mission SAR and MTI integrated
with Electro Optical
(EO) / Infra Red (IR)
Multi-Platform Radar
Technology Insertion
Program (MP-RTIP)
– track slow moving
PLANNING
ground vehicles and

cruise missiles
10 SKASaCS N/A Summer Nil Real-time datalink OSD 2018 Non Organic Core
2.5hr (day), Enhanced GMTI ISR asset, bid
4hr (night) Wide-area surveillance for through Bde
Winter: 4hr used to cue other ISTAR

assets
Can detect cars at
>50nm
Can detect a motorcycle
at >30nm

Can detect IDF
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
BASE ISTAR
Serial System Use Capabilities Constraints Employment considerations
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 DEWDROP Light Base Detect 3km Must be deployed at least Can be tripod mounted or 3m mast

ISTAR ID 2km 15m away from a comms Powered by 24v DC or batteries
Daylight and Thermal system due to interference
cameras
2 DEWDROP Light Base Made up of seismic DEWDROP over-watch DUGS may be split into 2 separate tasks:
(DUGS) ISTAR sensors linked to a DEW- camera must stay in deployment of UGS and deployment of
DROP camera confines of a guarded UGS Transmitters (UTX).
Range of UGS signal 5km location Twelve UGS and four UTX are supplied
when sent through TXR per system but it may not be necessary to
transmitter deploy all of the equipment.
PLANNING
Battery life in place is There is no set ratio of UGS to UTX in

7 days any deployment. The only considerations
when deploying the UGS sub-system is
the maximum transmission range of each
UGS and UTX.
3 CLAMBAKE Light Base EO/TI Camera – Detect 10 mins set up time

ISTAR 1.5km Intuitive hand held control
ID 1km
Can be remoted 50m
2-51
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-52
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
4 BOOMERANG Acoustic shot Provides range and direc- Round must pass within Can be mounted on sangars and vehicles
detection tion of small arms firer. 50m of Boomerang for Any shot originating within 10m of the
system Can detect .20 - .50 cal, detection system is NOT reported (assumed to be
Automatic weapons and friendly/outgoing fire)
multiple shooters
Shooter range to Boomer-
ang – 0 to 500m+
5 SLD 500 Detecting The range varies accord- NOHD 21m - mark out no- Allows units to accurately localise a
(SNIPER the optics ing to climatic conditions, entry zone 21m radius threat, but also performs clear target
LASER originating atmospheric transmis- EOHD 285 m - no identification using its high definition
DETECTOR) from SA fire sion and the SEL (Laser magnifying optics inside daylight camera
Equivalent Surface) of this range
PLANNING
the target Post sentry to ensure

compliance with safety
zones
6 REVIVOR 2 Medium Comprised of a cam- High winds – weather Cdrs need to supplement the Detachment
Base ISTAR era mounted on an waiver must be signed Commander with personnel to enable
11.7mx3.81m aerostat. over 15kts. 24/7 coverage –attached RA personnel,

Dual mount EO/TI sensor EW, Ops Room signallers and COIST
and laser rangefinder. personnel should be considered (but loca-
Detect 4km and 3km tion dependant).
respectively. Powered by FEPS.
Flies at 350m. Can be remoted into the Ops Room –
500m max distance.

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
BASE ISTAR

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
7 REMOVER 3.1 Medium 21m mast High winds – limit of 45kts. Cdrs need to supplement the Detachment
Base ISTAR Detect 5km, ID 3km. Commander with personnel to enable
Low light contextual, EO/TI 24/7 coverage –attached RA personnel,
cameras. EW, Ops Room signallers and COIST
Recording and playback personnel should be considered (but loca-
capability tion dependant).
PLANNING
Powered by FEPS.
Can be remoted into the Ops Room –
500m max distance.
Main camera can be mounted on a tripod.
2-53
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-54
WEAPON LOCATING RADAR PLANNING DATA
Operated Employment
Serial System Use Capabilities Constraints
by considerations
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 Light- IDF 100m CAP - up to 15km Must be mounted in an STA Bty It can detect other munitions
weight detector After 15km, 0.7% of the range elevated position than mortars but will only clas-
Counter Counter Fire 6.5km detection sify them as “other than mortar
Mortar Sense and Warn 9.3km
Radar detection
(LCMR)
2 Mobile IDF Detection range out to 30km Limited capability against STA Bty Can be fwd mounted into FOBs
Artillery detector (50m CEP2 at 50km) rockets and recoilless rifle via CLP
Monitoring Ability to locate 8 targets simul-
PLANNING
Battlefield taneously (1600m arc)

Radar Ability to locate 100 targets in
(MAMBA) one minute
Detects guns and mortars
3 Acoustic Confir- Detection range out to approx Very limited capability STA Bty Surveyed and linked to CP via
Sound mation 30km with CEP of 50m at against rockets D10 or RAVEN
Ranging of POO 15km System effected by met 15 min in to action
Post (ASP) and POI conditions especially wind. Requires 400-500m baseline.
Performance degraded by Requires min 3 x sensor posts
areas of “sound shadow” for a CEP 50m
(woods, hills etc)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ELECTRONIC WARFARE PLANNING DATA
Operated Employment
by considerations
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 ICOM Hand held Planning Range: 2-5km ICOM has no direction find LEWT An interpreter is required to oper-

SCANNER wide band Operating frequency range: capability and ate/listen to the ICOM for it to be
commu- 530kHz - 3000 MHz patrols of benefit
nications Utilises 3x LR6 (AA) batts - 8hrs
intercept Intercept of single channel voice
scanner communications
Ability to prioritise target fre-
quencies or channels
2 SEER Man Planning Range: 5km 18kg limits ability to patrol Operated An interpreter is required
portable Operating frequency range: for long periods by LEWT Sensor antenna is best situated
PLANNING
intercept, 2MHz – 2590 MHz Ruggedised Laptop prone (1 SEER in an elevated location
directional 8hr battery life in patrol mode to failure in inclement per SEER EA effect is omni-
find and Weight: full weight: 46kg, patrol conditions LEWT) directional with a smaller
electronic configuration: 18kg planning range than airborne
attack (EA) Intercept of single channel voice EA. It is compatible with coalition
capability. communications ECM(FP) and the short range,

Ability to prioritise target fre- dependant on INS location and
quencies or channels comms means, and narrow band
reduces fratricide with coalition
comms
2-55
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-56
ELECTRONIC WARFARE PLANNING DATA
Operated Employment
by considerations
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
3 LEWT 2 Man Provide EW advice to BGHQ. A LEWT provides the following:

team Bde Asset and deployed to Cueing of other ISTAR.
equipped TSUs by the Bde EW Coordina- Assist the targeting process.
with the tion Cell (CEWCC). Immediate threat and situational
SEER and Manned by 2x Cpl-LCpl EW awareness at the tactical level.
ICOM. System Operators and 1x Increased IandW of enemy
PLANNING
interpreter activity, establishing patterns

of life and developing ability to
pre-empt enemy intentions (i.e.
identify combat indicators).
Force Protection.
EA needs to be requested via the

BEWCC

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SEARCH EQUIPMENT PLANNING DATA
Employment
Serial System Use Capabilities Constraints Operated by
considerations
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 Vallon High Metal 18-25 hr battery life (3 x 1.5v D Cell) Limited capability for Basic Search/ All detect

Content (HMC) Easy to use, low training burden detecting Low Metal patrols equipment,
Detector Content devices where pos-
Being phased out as sible, should be
primary patrol search separated from
detect equipment ECM and other
equipment by
2 Horn 1 High Metal Con- Battery life: Metal-12 hours, GPR-10 hours, Difficult to use, high All Arms patrol a distance of
tent (HMC), Low dual-8 hours (Rechargeable or 4 x 1.5v training burden search/AAST 10m
Metal Content D Cell) Slow advance speed
(LMC) and No Affected by wet
PLANNING
3 Horn 2 Metal Content Upgraded to include Ground Tracking weather and

(NMC) Detector Algorithm (GTA) undulating ground
4 Goldie Command Wire Battery life 6-8 hours (4 x AA) Does not fold down to All Arms
Detector Search at patrolling pace small size for carriage Patrol Search,
Very easy to use, low training burden when not in use AAST, AST
Excellent aid to VP360
5 Hood- Hand held Detonator/MUV Fuse at 65mm High Metal Content Basic search,
lum person search Sawblade at 100mm; 9mm pistol at 200mm only All Arms
and confirmation 1 x 9v PP3 gives 50 hours battery life Patrol Search,
detector Very easy to use, minimal training burden AAST, AST
2-57
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-58
PERSONAL WEAPON EQUIPMENT PLANNING DATA
Ser Small Arms/Sp Wns Calibre Ammo Maximum Battle Range (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Pistol (SIG l105A2 or 9mm Ball 45m

Browning L9A1)
2 Rifle (SA80 L85A2) 5.56mm Ball Tracer 300m/200m individual; 600m section
3 LSW (L86A2) 5.56mm Ball Tracer 800m

AP
4 LMG (L110A3) 5.56mm Ball Tracer Max Effec Range 400 m/Trgt can be engaged up to 600m
Cyclic 850 rpm
Normal 25 rpm Rapid 100 rpm
PLANNING
100 rd belt gives 5 secs burst
5 Sniper Rifle (L115A3) 8.59mm (.338) Ball 600m-1000m dependant on skill of firer
6 Sharp Shooter Rifle 7.62mm Ball 600m-800m dependant on skill of firer

(L129 A1)
7 UGL (L123A3) 40mm HE 150m

350m (indirect fire)
8 Combat Shotgun (128A1) 12 gauge (18.4mm) Solid shot 130m

Buck shot 40m

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
9 GPMG (L7A2) 7.62mm All Ball 800m

(Light Role) 1B 1T Normal 25 rpm
4B 1T Rapid100 rpm

10 GPMG (L7A2) 7.62mm Ball 1100 (tracer burnout)
(SF) 1B 1T 1800 (observed strike)
4B 1T Up to 2500 (map predicted fire)
Normal 100rpm and Rapid 200 rpm
11 HMG (L2A1) 12.7mm (.50) Ball Tracer 1200m (tracer burnout) 485-635 rounds per minute
1800m (strike observed) 50 rd belt 6 secs burst
4500m (map predicted)
PLANNING
12 60mm Mortar 60mm HE (2.8kg)* 800m Normal rate of fire 3 bombs per
(M6-640) Smoke (2.8kg) minute Rapid rate of fire 8 bombs
Illuminating (2.3kg) per minute
12a 60mm Mortar 60mm HE HEWP 200m-3470m (3720m Rate 1-12 Rpm/Up to 20 Rpm in
(M6-895) Smoke LA2A1 exceptional Circumstances for

Illuminating Illum 350m-3270m short periods
13 81mm Mortar 81mm HE (4.5kg) 5675m (Mk 4 Ammo) Low 1-4 bomb/min
(L16A2) Smoke (4.5kg) 4800m Med 5-8
Illuminating (4.6kg) High 9-12
2-59
HE = High explosive WP = Smoke Illum = Illuminating *weight in kg of each bomb
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-60
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
14 LASM (L72A9) 66mm Enhanced Blast 500m Prep time 8 secs

Explosive
14a ASM (M72A9) 66mm Enhanced Blast 15m-400m Effective (600m) Prep time 8 secs
Explosive 2 stage warhead blast mode or
mousehole
15 Grenade HE (L109A1) N/A HE 25-35m Thrown
16 Grenade No 84 (RP) N/A HE 25-35m Thrown

PLANNING
(L84A1/A2)
17 GMG (L134A1) 40mm HE (Medium 1.5km point targets, 2km for 340 rds per min
Velocity) area cover
18 JAVELIN (FGM-148) 127mm HEAT Top Attack 150m-2500m Deliberate 2 missiles/min LOBL
Direct Attack 65m-2500m Fire and Forget System
19 NLAW (K170A) 150 mm HEAT 20-600m

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AVIATION EQUIPMENT PLANNING DATA
Max Tps Casualties Speed (kts)
Ser Helicopters Armament Weapon Range CEMO / Stretchers Camera
CEFO (sitting) Endurance*

HELLFIRE up to 16 500 – 8000m Day/ Night TV. FLIR. 110
CRV7 Rockets up 350-4500m
Nil Nil
1 Apache AH1 to 76 3500m
30mm up to 1200 2hrs
Ammn figs are maximums. Actual load will vary. Standard weapon load (Charlie) is x8 HELLFIRE, x38 rockets, x330 30mm
2 x M134 1500m 120

Chinook HC 1 x M60 1100m
2 40 / 40 6 (30) N/A Mk 2,4,6: 2:30
Mk2/3/4/5/6
PLANNING
Mk 3,5: 4:45
1 x GPMG 1100m 1 (3) Role fit MX15 Camera capability. 120

Can provide target dependant Downlink available, issued
3 Lynx Mk7 3/5
ID by handheld on msn specific basis. Not
laser sparkle Rover compatible. 2hrs
1 x 12.7mm (.50) 1850m 1 (3) Role fit MX10 Camera capability.

120
M3M Can provide target dependant Downlink available, issued
4 Lynx Mk9a ID by handheld 3/5 on msn specific basis. Not
Or 1 x GPMG
laser sparkle Rover compatible. 2hrs
2-61
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AVIATION EQUIPMENT PLANNING DATA
2-62
Max Tps Casualties Speed (kts)
Ser Helicopters Armament Weapon Range CEMO / Stretchers Camera
CEFO (sitting) Endurance*
Merlin 3 x GPMG 1100m 120

5 22 / 24 6 (20) N/A
Mk3/3A 4-5 hrs
Puma HC 2 x GPMG 1100m 120

6 12 / 15 2 (12) N/A
Mk2 2:45
1 x M3M (or GPMG) 1850m MX15 Camera capability. 130

Wildcat AH No downlink available as
7 3/3 1(1)
Mk1 at 2014 but it is a priority
upgrade. 2 hrs
*Endurance figures are for aircraft fitted for primary role and with maximum internal fuel load, operating at sea level in a temperate
climate. Endurance figures may reduce as transit times increase.
• Millilux. Millilux = Ambient Light Levels. The minimum millilux levels required for SH to continue operations on NVD varies considerably
by theatre. In the UK there is no published minimum due to high ambient light levels; in a desert environment the minimum is likely to be
10 Millilux. In this environment >10 millilux = Green illum. <10 millilux = Red illum and no fly.
• Red illum. IRT, HRF and aircraft on Deliberate Op tasks may fly below these limits, if operationally essential. Black illum (IR illum) will
need to be considered. Black illum can be provided by ground units in support of Rotary Wing Aviation.
• Note: Red and Green illum are the actual light levels and Black illum is the IR light provided by 105mm Field Gun, 81mm mortar
or 1.5 hand held rocket para illum.

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AIR DELIVERED MUNITIONS PLANNING DATA
Serial AC type Air to surface weapon options Remarks
(a) (b) (c) (d)

1 Tornado GR4 27mm cannon AI and CAS.
Recce pod can be carried for Tac Recce.
Paveway II/ EPW II ALARM is generally used for self protection only.
LITENING III Pod
Paveway III/EPW III
Paveway IV is main Air to Surface bomb
500lb PAVEWAY IV STORMSHADOW: used on pre-planned, fixed targets
BRIMSTONE
STORMSHADOW
PLANNING
ALARM
2 Typhoon Brimstone Litening III laser-designator pod.

ISR (FMV & Stills)
Storm Shadow EPW
Paveway IV
Paveway II/EPW II
2-63
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-64
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 AV-8B 20mm cannon Full Motion Video (FMV) via Litening Targeting pod which
down links to Rover & FIRESTORM.
GBU38 500LB JDAM (GPS)
GBU54v4 500LB laser/GPS(JDAM)
4 A-10 30mm cannon Maverick usually TV-guided (with shaped charge war-
head), but could be IR or laser.
500 lb Mk-82
2,000 lb Mk-84
2.75-inch rockets
PLANNING
AGM-65 (Maverick)
5 F-16 20mm cannon Multi-role ac with CAS capability.

Some nations daylight only.
500 lb Mk-82
2,000 lb Mk-84
6 F -15E One 20mm multibarrel cannon. Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting Infrared for Night
(LANTIRN) system
500 lb Mk-82
Day/night, all weather capability.
2,000 lb Mk-84

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
7 F-18 20 mm cannon USMC specialise in CAS role.

Ni capable.
2000 lb Mk-84

CRV-7 rocket pods
AGM-65 (Maverick)
8 B1B JDAM SAR
500 lb Mk-82
2,000 lb Mk-84
Mk-85 naval mines

PLANNING
Mk-62 naval mines
9 AC-130 H 40mm cannon FLIR

LLLTV
105mm cannon
Laser tgt designator
10 AC-130 U 40mm cannon FLR ALLTV

SAR
105mm cannon Tgt designator
25mm gatling gun.
2-65
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-66
(a) (b) (c) (d)
11 AH 64 30mm cannon
Hellfire AGM-114K
Hellfire AGM-114K1A
Hellfire AGM -114N
Hellfire AGM-114M (RF)
CRV7 Rockets (all types)

PLANNING

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
CAS RISK-ESTIMATE DISTANCES (REDS) GUIDANCE
INTRODUCTION
REDs. REDs allow ground comds to estimate the danger to Friendly
Forces (FF) from a CAS attack. FACs will have the correct REDs tables
and will be able to advise comds appropriately.
Probability of Incapacitation (PI). These distances are defined by the
0.1% PI to the FF. This means that 0.1% (or 1 in 1000) FF troops at this
range will become a casualty. FF may still be subject to wpns effects
well outside the RED but at a reduced PI. FF at shorter ranges will have
a higher PI; however, the PI is not linear.
There are numerous wpn and wpn delivery characteristics which
affect the PI, and they can be significantly affected by topographical
characteristics.
Danger Close. Ordinance delivered inside the 0.1% PI distance will be
considered “Danger Close”.
Risk. The comd should discuss the risks of a CAS attack with the FAC.
The supported comd must accept responsibility for the risk to FF when
tgts are inside the Danger Close range.
Ground Comd’s Initials. Risk acceptance is confirmed when the
supported comd passes his initials to the attacking a/c through the FAC,
signifying that he accepts the risk inherent to Danger Close deliveries.
Max Range REDs. “Max Range REDs” are the largest distances from
wpn impact, in any direction, at which the wpn effect has a 0.1% PI.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-67

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
RISK MITIGATION
Cross Range REDs. Due to the shape of the effects from air delivered
wpns there is an area at 90º to the wpn line of impact in which the
0.1% PI distance is greatly reduced. This can be used to reduce the
REDs. Depending on the disposition of the FF and the tgt, and wpn
effects, it may not always be possible for the attack to be carried out
from a suitable direction to achieve this.
Protected REDs. “Protected REDs” can be used to reduce the risk to

FF in the following circumstances:
• FF are behind an adobe wall of 10 cm or greater thickness (walls
constructed of other material can be used if the assessment of the
structure is of greater protection level than an adobe wall).
• FF are entirely below ground level (ie in a ditch with nothing
protruding above ground level).
• All FF are in a vehicle offering P2 protection or greater.
Other Methods. If the use of Cross Range or Protected REDs is not

possible, or does not provide the required level of mitigation, the comd
in consultation with the FAC should consider the following:
• Using a different wpn that will still achieve the comd’s aims, but
reduces the risk to FF.
• If the tactical situation allows, consider withdrawing FF to a position
of cover, or a greater distance from the tgt to reduce the risk to FF.
• If the tactical situation dictates that the engagement must occur at
Danger Close range the FAC can mitigate the risk to FF by issuing
a Mandatory Attack Heading for the engagement that ensures the
areas of greatest weapons effect are not directed at the FF.
• Reducing the wpn effects through fusing or delivering the wpn in a
manner that reduces the overall effect. This may also reduce the
effectiveness of the wpn on the tgt.
2-68 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
SMALL ARMS DIRECT FIRE WEAPONS
LSW
800
60mm MOR
700
SECTION IW
SHARPSHOOTER 600 RPK LMG
(L129A1)
N-LAW
LSM 500
LMG
ASM 400 AKM
SA80 A2 300 AK-47
200 RPG-18
(HEAT)
UGL
COMBAT SHOTGUN
(SOLID SHOT)
100
PISTOL
COMBAT SHOTGUN PISTOL
(BUCK SHOT)
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-69

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
SMALL ARMS DIRECT FIRE WEAPONS
1600
(STRIKE OBSERVED)
HMG = 1800m
GMG 1500 DsHK HMG
1400
SNIPER RIFLE
1300 (DRAGONOV)**
HMG
(TRACER 1200
BURNOUT)
GPMG
(TRACER
1100
BURNOUT)
SNIPER RIFLE 1000 RPO-A

(L115A3)*
RPG-7
900
GPMG
(LT ROLE) 800 RPG-18
*MAX RANGE *MAX RANGE

MIN = 600m MIN = 800m
2-70 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
ENEMY WEAPONS
Maximum Battle Range
En Weapon Calibre Ammo
(m)
TT-33
7.62mm Ball 50m
Tokarev pistol
AK - 47 7.62mm Ball Tracer 300m
AKM 7.62mm Ball Tracer 400m
Dragunov 800m-1300m dependant

7.62mm Ball
SVD on skill of firer
RPK LMG 7.62mm Ball Tracer 600m
PKM GPMG 7.62mm Ball Tracer 800m
DsHK HMG 12.7mm Ball Tracer 1500m
RPG-7 40mm HE 920m
RPG-16 58mm HEAT 800m
RPG-18 64mm HEAT 200m
Thermo- 20 – 1000m max depend-

RPO-A 93mm
baric ant on skill of firer
2S-12 Hvy Mor 120mm HE 500 – 7100m
20mm
AMX10-P IFV cannon/ HEIAP 1500m
7.62 MG
14.5mm
BRDM-2 Armd
HMG/ Ball 2000m max
Car
7.62M MG
90mm
ERC-90 Recce HEAT/
cannon/ 2000m max
Car AFPS-DS
7.62 MG
73mm
BMP-1 IFV HEAT 500m direct/1300m indirect
/7.62 MG
30mm
HE-T/ 1500m direct/2500m
BMP-2 IFV cannon/
AP-T indirect
7.62 MG
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-71

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Indirect Fire Weapon Splinter Distances

155mm:
1. Lethal Splinter Distance Ground Burst = 55m
2. Lethal Splinter Distance Air Burst = 85m
3. Safe Splinter Distance Ground Burst (protected) = 200m
4. Safe Splinter Distance Air Burst (protected) = 250m
5. Safe Splinter Distance Ground Burst (unprotected) = 400m
6. Safe Splinter Distance Air Burst (unprotected) = 500m
105mm:
7. Lethal Splinter Distance Ground Burst = 40m
8. Lethal Splinter Distance Air Burst = 50m
9. Safe Splinter Distance Ground Burst (protected) = 125m
10. Safe Splinter Distance Air Burst (protected) = 200m
11. Safe Splinter Distance Ground Burst (unprotected) = 250m
12. Safe Splinter Distance Air Burst (unprotected) = 400m
Mortars
13. Lethal Splinter Distance = 40m
14. Danger Splinter Distance = 190m
Safe Splinter Distance with Mortar line-to-target distance greater
than 3km = 300m (protected = 150m)
Safe Splinter Distance with Mortar line-to-target distance with less
than 3km = 250m (protected = 100m)
When Mortars are supporting troops who are under armour

fully closed down, the following safety distances apply:
Challenger/MBT = 30m CVRT Series = 110m
Warrior Series = 50m AFV 430 Series = 110m
2-72 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Indirect Fire Weapon Splinter Distances

81mm
250
200
190m
14
150
100
40m
50
13
50m
55m
40m
8
1
7
85m
125m
2
250m
9
4
200m
250m
200m
10
11
3
400m
500m
105mm
155mm
400m
6
5
12
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-73

CIS
CIS ESTIMATE CONSIDERATIONS
PLANNINGFOR BATTLE GROUP /FOR 7Q ESTIMATE
COMPANY PROCESS
GROUP PLANNING
2-74
UNDERSTAND INTENT
Q0 - Baseline Prep and Understanding Q3 - WHAT EFFECTS /ACTION DO I NEED TO ACHIEVE?
Timeline IDENTIFY AND PRIORITISE IDENTIFY AND PRIORITISE
Receive Op O/ CIP/CEI Present Key G6
WngO1 THE NETS REQUIRED THE STATIONS REQUIRED
Freedoms &
Draft Comd & Sig
Constraints UP/ DOWN/SIDEWAYS/
Draft G6 MAIN/ STEP UP/ A1/A2/TAC/B/
ROOB Annex REDUNDANCY/ATTS/DETS/ RearHQ/RRB
REGROUP/CLEAR HAIL
Q1 - WHAT IS THE SITUATION AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT ME? Primary EXCON (LOCON/HICON)
Understand Advise G2 of EF EW Advise BGE how the Alternate
+
Contingency UK Ops
Threat and capability: TERRAIN
Emergency
Human Terrain JAMMING/OF/INTERCEPT/ and ENVIRONMENT JOINT
Analysis DECEPTION/EF Elec MD/ may affect What level does each net need to
MLCOA comms be all informed to?
Q1 Back Brief
PLANNING
What is the lowest level that

requires a net?
Q2 - WHAT HAVE I BEEN TOLD TO DO AND?
Analyse 2 Up & Understand Key considerations: Draft your Intent
1Up Comms Task Org TMI SPACE/POWER MANAGEMENT =
Understand my (PRI OF COMMS/EMCON/PLANNING Identify & Draft your Main Effort inc. who it may lie with
unit/sub-unit’s Advise RANGES/RRB/FOR CE PROTECTION

part in the plan. Comd REQUIREMENTS/REGROUPING Commander’s Direction Brief-break into COA development teams
how SV PLAN/EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE
may effect WngO2
mission Update Comd & Sig
Update G6 Annex
Q2 Msn Analysis (Back Brief?)

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DEVELOP PLAN
Q4- WHERE BEST CAN I ACCOMPLISH EACH ACTION/ EFFECT? Q6- WHERE & WHEN DO THE ACTIONS/ EFFECTS Q7- WHAT CONTROL
TAKE PLACE IN RELATION TO EACH ANOTHER? MEASURES DO I NEED TO
NETS STATION IMPOSE?
WHEN: WHERE:
Allocate frequency Understand What Tier is ELECTRONIC PROTECTION
NOTICE TO MOVE/NO How do comms
band (UHF/VHF/ operational locations: required? MEASURES
MOVE BEFORE/NETS change,or need to
HF) to each NET NOW 1 (BRONZE)

OPEN/Y-Hr/L-Hr/H-Hr/ change,as the battle ACTIVE (Detectable)
(Consult BSM) FUTURE 2 (SILVER) P-Hr IN LOCATION BY/ progresses in relation to Frequency changes/
POTENTIAL 3 (GOLD) COMMS ESTABLISHED BY/ the ground? Transmission modes/
STATION ESTABLISHED BY Reflectors/Repeaters
Consider: PPA/ DISTANCES/ ENVIRONMENT/ TERRAIN/ WATER
TABLE/ TIME OF YEAR/ ALLOCATED FREQUENCIES PASSIVE (Not detectable)
COA Back Briefs to Commander Power Settings/Encryption/
Q5- WHAT RESOURCES DO I NEED TO ACCOMPLISH
Codes/Antenna siting (inc.
EACH ACTION/EFFECT? Commander’s Decision Brief screening)/Directional & Shielded
NETS STATION Consider: How does your comms plan fit into the antennas/EMCON
RADIOS/MASTS/ Manpower required to: wider operational plan?
PLANNING
ANTENNAS/VEHICLES/ OPERATE Are they mutually supporting? ANTI EM-FRATRICIDE

BATTERIES/CHARGING/ PROTECT What is the risk if they are not? MEASURES (Consider
LINE (+EQUIPMENT)/ Updating initial planning timeline TASKORG & FF from Q2)
Non comms-equipment required A SYNCH MATRIX Frequency Change Lines
CRYPTO/ FREQUENCIES/
to run the station:
PRESETS/SPECIALIST
MANDATORY/ESSENTIAL/ ADVISE BATTLESPACE
EQUIPMENT WngO3
DESIRABLE/COMFORT MANAGER OF G6 LOCATIONS
Refine Comd & Sig/G6 Annex AND PROPOSE NFAs (or other CM)
Consider: What do you need to ask your higher command for? Contribute to G4 Annex BLUE/GREEN/RED/WHITE
What risk is there if you aren’t allocated those resources? Refine Communications Plan/Orders
What is already in situ? Consider: The Physical Threat too
Draft Missions and Tasks Complete Comd & Sig/

If possible complete and distribute CEI
G6 Annex/cip and CEI
Submit equipment request
2-75
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-76
BOWMAN PLANNING DATA
BOWMAN DATA SHEET
PRC FREQ RANGE HUB POWER OPTIONS ANTENNA PLANNING

NUMBER RANGE
VHF RADIOS
PRC 354 1mW, 100mW, 1W, 5W 0.8m, 1.6m WHIPS, ANY 5W = 5km
VHF COAXIAL FED 16W = 12km
PRC 355 ANTENNA 50W = 30km
PRC 356 1mW, 100mW, 1W, 5W,
30 - 87.975 MHz @ 25 3.6V 30 DAYS OF MISSION
16W, 50W
PRC 357 Hz SPACING ESSENTIAL INFO
VRC 358 1mW, 100mW, 1W, 5W, VEH ANTENNA, ANY

PLANNING
16W VHF COAXIAL FED

VRC 359 ANTENNA
HF RADIOS
PRC 325 1.6 - 29.9999MHz @ 3.6V 30 DAYS OF MISSION 1W, 5W, 20W 2.4M WHIP, DIPOLE, 32 km
100Hz SPACING ESSENTIAL INFO ANY HF COAXIAL FED

PRC 327 ANTENNA
VRC 328 DIPOLE, ANY HF CO-

AXIAL FED ANTENNA
VRC 329 10W, 30W, 100W

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
BOWMAN DATA SHEET
PRC FREQ RANGE HUB POWER OPTIONS ANTENNA WORKING

NUMBER RANGE
UHF RADIOS
PRC 343 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz 256 5CM STUB RURAL 500M
(PRR) CHANNELS SUB URBAN
250M
PLANNING
AN/PRC - 30 - 512 MHz 5W LOS, 10W Burst Broadband Whip/RF-

152 SatCom 3080 SatCom
VRC 340 225 - 450 MHz VARIABLE POWER, 18km

(HCDR) SELF DETERMINED
2-77
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
(CONVERSION TABLES)
Example: 10 Kilometres = 6.21 Miles 10 Miles = 16.09 Kilometres
cm Inches km Miles
2.54 1 0.39 1.61 1 0.62
12.70 5 1.97 8.05 5 3.11
25.40 10 3.94 16.09 10 6.21
Metre Feet Metre Yard
0.31 1 3.28 0.91 1 1.09
1.52 5 16.40 4.57 5 5.47
3.05 10 32.81 9.14 10 10.94
Litres Pints Litres Gallons
0.57 1 1.76 4.55 1 0.22
Gram Ounce kg lbs
28.35 1 0.4 0.45 1 2.20
kg/sq cm Lbs/sq in
0.70 1 14.22
Degrees Mils Degrees Mils
1 18 7 126
2 36 8 142
3 54 9 162
4 72 10 180
5 90 100 1800
6 108
MILS/DEGREE CONVERSION TABLE

Mils Deg Mils Deg
800 NE 45 4000 SW 225
1600 E 90 4800 W 270
2400 SE 135 5600 NW 315
3200 S 180 6400 N 360
MPH SPEED CONVERSION

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
KPH
2-78 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
UK OPERATIONS
The involvement of Defence in assisting central government and civil
authorities at sub-national and local levels is usually confined to times
of emergency - civil contingencies. During a response, the government
will have a number of strategic priorities specific to that operation, but
the protection of life, alleviation of distress, exercising control over the
incident and setting the conditions for a return to normality will feature
consistently. UK Public Service Rank insignia can be seen in SOHB
pg 4.7.5.
The Civil Contingencies Act 2004 (CCA04) and JDP 02 outline the role
of Defence in assisting the achievement of this aim by providing:
• Specialist advice or skills e.g. EOD, CBRN, search, SF, aviation.

• A pool of disciplined manpower and supporting resources e.g.
transport, estate, tents, comms.
Note: the use of Defence may be expensive and is rarely the preferred
option - it can give the perception of local government failing. The
costs of using Defence support are usually recouped at Ministry level.
Military Assistance to the Civil Authority (MACA) consists of:

MAGD - Military Aid to Government Departments: Urgent work of
national importance e.g. providing fuel tanker drivers. Authorised at
ministerial level. Costs recouped by MoD.
MACP - Military Aid to the Civil Power: Support to the civil powers
(mainly the police but also the prison service) in the maintenance of law
and order e.g. support to prison officers, EOD. Authorised at ministerial
level. Costs recouped by MoD.
MACC - Military Aid to Civil Community: Emergency assistance in
order to protect life, alleviate distress and protect significant property
e.g. floods, adverse weather, searches for vulnerable persons. Cost
implications waived if there is a threat to life. Authorised by the local
commander - can be anyone but likely CO or Bde Comd.
Types of Responder:
• Category 1. Blue light services (Fire, Police, Ambulance) plus

certain government bodies - local authorities/councils, Environment
Agency, NHS Trusts, Maritime & Coastguard etc.
• Category 2. Utilities and other arms of government, railway &
airport operators, harbour & highways authorities, Health & Safety
executive.
Note:the MOD is not a categorised responder under CCA04 and,

therefore has no requirement to respond within the framework of this
legislation.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-79

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Civilian Command levels. No agency will be able to command the

resources of another in most operations, especially those that require
a multi-agency response. Most events will see a response that is co-
ordinated rather than commanded. Command and co-ordination levels
are not always related to rank as it is in Defence. Rather, those placed
in positions of responsibility may be SMEs in that particular field,
although effort is made to try to align this with the rank hierarchy. Each
command and co-ordination level refers to the grouping rather than
one commander - ‘Gold’ is not one person.
Gold: Strategic level. The chairing of a Strategic Co-ordination group

during a response phase will nearly always be undertaken by a police
officer (police have primacy at Gold under CCA04). However a senior
officer from another categorised agency may take the chair if it is clear
that that agency should assume the lead status: it may be Fire or Amb
depending on the incident. Attendees will be the people in overall
control of their organisation’s resources for that incident or empowered
representative. Likely to run from an ‘ops room/command centre’ at
the county police force HQ or a similar facility but will not located at the
incident site. Military link is likely Bde Comd or his representative.
Silver: Tactical level (Operational in military parlance). Takes strategic

direction and converts it to tasks for Bronze. A multi-agency forum that
is usually police led. Silver will usually be situated at a police HQ or
similar facility in the nearest large town. Military link may be a Joint
Regional Liaison Officer (JRLO) or deputy, or a unit CO.
Bronze: Operational level (Tactical in military parlance). Executes

direct control of resources at the scene. Usually co-ordinated by the
police, who will likely have primacy. Military link is likely to be an OC.
General Considerations
1. Defence assumes a supporting role. It is not subject to CCA04 and
the principle of ‘civil primacy’ applies throughout.
2. Civilian environment: mannerisms, speech and conduct must be

appropriate and understandable - and vice versa.
3. Decisions are usually made by consensus not direction.
4. Be clear with what you can and cannot do: reputational risk.
5. Where appropriate, Defence will be represented at Gold, Silver

and Bronze.
6. Political implications, including ‘the devolved piece’, and

exploitation of emergency situations.
7. Yellow Pages Test: if someone else can do it better then they

probably should e.g. commercial organisations (Tesco) may have
agreements with local authorities to provide water, food etc in
extremis.
2-80 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PLANNING
Tactical Considerations
Plan
• Is this a military task - can it be done better by someone else?

• Confirm C2 and where you sit in the wider plan
• What can other agencies do to help us?
• Duration
• Media Lines To Take
• Reputational risk - you must be able to deliver what you offer
• What is the impact of the uniform - anywhere to avoid? Dress for
recces?
Resource
• RSOI - need SMEs

• RSOI requires robust command structure
• Clarify and obtain legal requirements e.g. driver / plant operating
quals, waivers
• Health and Safety
• Issue and recovery of kit
• OPLOC’ing - controlling manpower
• Tri–Service considerations: kit, command, expectation manage-
ment
Execute
• Multi-agency approach will affect prioritisation of tasks

• Maintain a Key Decision Making Log
• Make and keep Risk Assessments
• Keep an Operational Record
• Be flexible, think ahead but not in isolation
Key Decision Making Log: outlines times and thinking behind key
decisions to justify them legally in the future. This process is standard
with Cat 1 responders. It is often kept by an assistant to the com-
mander. Should include:
• Date and time of decision

• The decision itself
• Key themes/background elements that supported the decision (the
justification)
• Recipients
• Method of communication
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 2-81

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
2-82 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 3
ORDERS

Content Pages
2 3 4 5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
WARNING ORDERS
• Situation - Including comds’ intent one and two levels up, ground
and enemy. Consider using schematics to bring 1-up and 2-up to life
- and your own SoM. Makes it easier for the audience to understand.
• Probable Mission - Probable mission/tasks and probable missions
for subordinates.
• Own Main Effort - Own Main Effort if known/applicable.
• Timings - Earliest H Hour and No Move Before time (NMB). To
enable concurrent activity - sleep, admin etc.
• O Gp - RV and Time.
• CSS - Essential matters/changes to SOPs only.
• Acknowledgement. Mnemonic SPOTOCA.
CAN INCLUDE:
• Orders for prelim ops, recce, regrouping or moves. ISTAR/STAP
tasking.
• Assembly Area details.
• Movement of advance and harbour parties.
• Liaison requirements.
• Limitations on recce, mov and use of tpt/hels.
• CSS additional service support, replen, rest, repair and
recovery, move of echelon.
• Command and Signal special instructions, establishing rebros,
movement of HQs.
Note: Never delay a Warning Order to make it more comprehensive.

Updates can be sent as supplementary information.
PRELIMINARIES
• Security of Orders Group. Location; sentries; actions on attack;
interpreters; LN.
• Administration. Introduce attached personnel; seating plan (in
accordance with task org); model and/or diagrams; map folds,
traces, map marking. Use plain language when working with
Indiginous and Coalition forces.
• Weather. First/last light, forecast; moon state (rise/set); visibility:
wind.
• Task Organisation. Atts and dets; interpreters; C2 relationships
(Page 2-11).
• Ground. Describe model or sketch; relate to the ground; give
orientation brief.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-1

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
QUICK ATTACK
PRELIMS
a. Taskorg - c/s and task.
b. Ground - sketch map. Enemy vital ground, objectives, obstacles,
FUP/LD & FSp locs, routes.
SITUATION
Enemy Forces Friendly Forces
• Str • Intentions • 2 up Comds intent (if relevant)
• Wpns • Vital Ground • 1 up Comds mission & plan (incl.
• Locs • DFs INTENT and ME)
• Arcs • Air Threat • Locs and future actions of
• Killing areas • Morale neighbouring forces (incl. allies)
• Eqpt • CBRN • Outline FSp plan
• Obstacles • Air/Avn
• IF REQUIRED Host Nation Forces /

Civilians / Key infrastructure
MISSION. From superior commander’s orders (stated twice)
EXECUTION.
a. Concept of Ops
• Intent. The effects to be achieved.
• Scheme of Manoeuvre. A description of how the mission will
be achieved - the what, where, when and how. Usually given
chronologically with main timings only.
• Main Effort. The activity crucial to the success of the ission.
b. Subordinate Missions. What they are to achieve and why.
Reserves given ‘Be Prepared To’ tasks; indirect FSp given tasks in
priority order.
c. Coordinating Instructions
Sqn/Coy/Bty Tp/Pl
• Loc FUP/LD • Action on EEF
• Route to FUP • Switch fire signal
• OOM to FUP • Combat ID
• Action in FUP • LOE
• Formation to cross LD • Fireplan
• Axis of attack • H Hr
• Re-org
d. Summary. Can be given at end.

SERVICE SUPPORT. Essential info or changes to SOP. Consider eqpt
/ ammo distro, change to casevac, Log RV.
COMMAND AND SIGNAL. Loc of HQs, alternate comd, codewords,
synchronise watches.
Questions
3-2 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
GENERIC ORDERS
1. SITUATION
Enemy Forces Friendly Forces
(Deductions from Q1): (Deductions from Q2):
• Str • 2-up comd’s intent
• Locs • 1-up comd’s msn, concept of ops (inc
• Wpns intent and ME)
• Eqpt • Locs and future actions of neighbouring
• Obs forces (inc allies)
• DFs • Outline FSp plan, ISR
• Air Threat (Air, Avn, UAS) • Air/Avn
• Morale • Host nation police and military
• Intentions
• CBRN Civilians/Human Terrain
• Child Soldiers
• NGOs
• OGDs
• Host nation govt
• Refugees
• Friendly and unfriendly
• Locs and mvts
2. MISSION
Stated verbatim from superior comd’s orders (always stated twice).
3. EXECUTION
Concept of Operations:
• Intent. The effect(s) to be achieved.
• Scheme of Manoeuvre. A description of how the mission will
be achieved - the what, where, when and how. Usually given
chronologically. Main timings only. (See check notes for specific
operations).
• Main Effort. The activity considered crucial to the success of the
mission.
• Subordinate Missions. Reserves should only be given ‘be prepared
to tasks’. Indirect FSp should be given tasks in priority order.
(Example: 1 Section. You are to FIX enemy forces at compound ALPHA
in order to allow 2 and 3 Sections to CAPTURE compound BRAVO).
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-3

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
GENERIC ORDERS
Sqn/Coy/Bty Tp/Pl
• Tps • Sects
• Pls • AFVs and Veh
• Armour • Mor
• AFVs and Veh • GPMG (SF)
• Mors/MFC • Snipers
• ATGW • Armr
• Recce • Sp Wpns
• GPMG (SF)
• Snipers
• Arty
• FST (Guns, UAS/ISR, Avn, Air)
• Engr / EOD
Callsigns may be used
(See check notes for specific operations).
Coordinating Instructions.
(Insert specific operation detail from pages 3-5 to 3-31).
Summary/Execution. (Can be given after Command and Signal para).

Normally a brief of how the action will be conducted, emphasising the
critical activities, given by the Comd without notes.
4. SERVICE SUPPORT
SOP Variations Log Sp Med ES
• Dress • Tpt and rec • Locs • Comms eqpt
• Eqpt • Replen plan • MEDEVAC • Vehs
• Wpns • Ammo • Stretchers • User prep
• ECM carriage • Rats • Med packs • Commanders
• Cbt ID eqpt • POL • Morphine functional test
• Veh loading • Water • Tourniquet • Report faults
• CBRN eqpt • Btys
• CIED eqpt • CPERS/
Detainees
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL

HQs Comms Passwords and ECM
codes
• Locs • CEI changes • Codewords • Carriage
• Mvts • Call signs • Nicknames • Actions on
• Alt comd (inc air) • Nicknumbers
• Freqs • Prowords (page
• R2 3-8)
• CSCM
• EMCON
• Time and Loc
Synchronize and Questions
3-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ADVANCE TO CONTACT AND
DELIBERATE ATTACK
Coordinating Instructions
Timings
• Mov Timings • HHr • Clear by/secure by
• To assy area • Adv to • Rehearsals
• To FUP • Seize by
Prelim Mov Assy Area FSP/LD FUP/LD

DOP
• Tpt • Loc • Loc • Loc
• Loc • Routes/OOM/ • Routes/OOM • Routes/OOM
• Route/OOM/ Packets • Markings • Markings
Packets • Actions on: • Actions on: • Action on:
• Actions on: Contact Contact Contact
breakdown; • Sy • Sy • Sy
• Prelim
ambush DOPMov
Control Measures
• LD • Bdys • Dismount area
• Report Lines • Rates of adv • By-pass policy
• Bounds • Method of mov • LOE
• Axis • AD wpn con Os • RoE
• OPSEC
Fire Plan
• Pris • Tgt list • Avn
• Arty • Fire units mov • AD
• Mors • Pris • ISTAR
• Anchor OP • Organic wpns • Appropriate/
• Adjustment • CAS Proportionate
Surprise and Security
• CSCM • Hide areas
• Flank protection • Deception
Actions On
• EEF • CPERS
• IED • Civ
• By-pass • Casualties
Reorg Instructions
• Arcs • AD plan
• Atk plan • GPMG (SF) tasks
• Actions on indirect fire and • Zulu muster
counter attack • Locs
• DFs/FPF
CBRN
• States • Reporting
• Detection Plans • Contamination control
• Alarms
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
NIGHT ATTACK
Tp/Pl Comd
• As per day attack with particular emphasis on:
Prep • Max rehearsals of actions in RVs and FUP
• Trg of tp/pl guides/sect guides
• Comd’s daylight recce of ground from OP
• Combat ID (glint, IR laser, Firefly, Buzzsaw, DIRM)
• Illum Plan (with Pl Sgt)
• Led by scouts but tp/pl comd responsible for nav

• Max use of II
Move
• Speed of move con to allow rear tps to keep up
to FUP • Actions on being pre-seen
• Con easier if FUP close to en
• Direction aids:
Compass bearing/pace checkers
Tracer
Prominent landmarks/skyline features Moon/Pole Star/
Assault Min changes of dir
• Rate of adv half daylt rate
• Target acquisition
• Actions on EF use of illum/white light
• Min noise until contact made
• Min shouting once contact made
• Systematic to avoid confusion

Fight • Prevent convergence on muzzle flashes
Through • Min use of grens above ground level
Reorg • As per day light

• Tendency to bunch - sigs for success
• Pre-arranged DFs and FPF
• Guides and protection of supporting armr/wpns
Tp/Pl Sgt
• Check distr of CWS
• Check illum (work to illum plan)
Prep • After O Gp move to CSM with tp/pl guide Get tp/pl
positions in sqn/coy RV
• Route to sqn/coy check pt and position Route to FUP
• Return to sqn/coy RV
• Meet tp/pl and put into position
• Lead tp/pl through sqn/coy checkpoint to FUP
Move to • Apply EMCON State
FUP • Keep guide at rear
• Check tp/pl is together and where it should be in FUP
Asslt/ • Too much shouting adds to confusion

• Sects tend to converge on en gun flash
fight • Good con to avoid disorientation
through • Careful use of illum and grens
Reorg • Allow more time

• Regain comd/con as soon as possible
• Reapply EMCON State
3-6 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DEFENCE
Timings
• Prelim movs • Sentries • Cfm O
• Recce • Ptls • Completion
• Posn occupied • Work
Mov
• Recce pty • SP • Guides
• Main bdy • Rel Pt • Routes
• Assy area • No vehs fwd • OOM
Con Measures
• Bdys • Coord point
• FEBA/FLOT • Liaison front to back, left to right
• AD wpn con Os • RoE
• OPSEC
Coord of Fire
• Pris • Arcs
• Con • Tgt areas
Fire Plan
Indirect Direct
• Pris • Pris
• Arty • Organic wpns
• Mors • CAS
• Anchor OP • Avn
• Adjustment • AD
• DFs/FPF • Appropriate/Proportionate
• Appropriate/Proportionate
Deception and Security

• Screen/gnd • Track plan • False front
• Dummy posn • STAP • CSCM
Actions on
• Os for opening fire • Ground attack • CBRN
• Stand to • Air attack • En recce/en pen
• CPERS/Civ • Casualties
CBRN
• States • Detection • Reporting
• Warning • Contamination
control
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-7

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DEFENCE
Counter Attack
• NTM • Trace
Field Defence
• Priority of work • Wiring • Cratering
• Extent of work • Comms • Route denial
• Work parties • Fds of fire • Illumination point
• Stores RV
Patrols
• In • Fwd posn • Out
Track Discipline
• Runner routes
Sentries
• Day/night • Air • Ground
• Roster • Chemical
3-8 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
WITHDRAWAL
Timings
• No rearward mov • Mov out
• Kit packed • Deny until
• Rear recce mov • Clear of posn
• Behind trenches • Posn abandoned
• Thinning out timings • Clear of line …. by ….
• Har pty mov • At new loc
• Ptls in by
Rear Recce and Har Pty Control Measures

• Composition RV • Routes
• Tpt mov • Embussing pt
• RV tasks • Pl check pts and pl RV
• Coy RV
• Report lines
• Wdr sequence and OOM
• Veh routes
• Handover line
• Bdys
• Wpn control Os
• RoE
• OPSEC
Fire Plan
Indirect Direct
• Pris • Pris
• Arty • Organic Wpns
• Mors • CAS
• Anchor OP • Avn
• Adjustment • AD
• DFs/FPF • Appropriate/Proportionate
Surprise/Deception/Sy
• STAP • CSCM • Deception
Actions on
• Contact - during wdr; en-route Actions on attack from:
• Detainees • IED
• Civilians • Ground
(friendly and hostile) • Air
• Confirm RoE • CBRN hazard
• Casualties
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-9

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
WITHDRAWAL
Coy Check Coy RV BG Check BG RV

Point Point
• Loc • Loc • Loc • Loc
• Comd • Comd • Route to • Route to
• Routes to • Def • OOM to • Actions in
• OOM to • Routes to
• Actions in
New Position Eqpt Denial Policy

• Loc • Wpns
• Route to • Eqpt
• OOM • Vehs
• Rel pt • Ammo
• Actions at • POL
• No vehs fwd of …
CBRN
• States • Reporting
• Detection Plans • Contamination control
• Alarms
RELIEF IN PLACE
Timings Adv Party. Nominate, timings, tpt,

tasks, guides, signs.
Prelim Mov Mov. Routes, debussing pt or LZ, waiting

area, BG check pt, coy check pt, pl
check pt
Mov Sy During Relief
Con Measures Ptls
Ptls Fire Sp
Coord of Fire Deception
Fire Sp Change of Comd
CSCM
3-10 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PATROL
Situation. (specific additional considerations).
En Forces Friendly Forces

• Surv Devices • Actions of • Def posn layout
• Ptls neighbouring • Own defs
• Routine forces which may • Trip flares
affect the op • DFs
• Other ptls
• Outline fire sp plan
Execution:
• Intent. No change
• Scheme of Manoeuvre.
• (Insert relevant section for patrol).
• Recce
• Observation Posts and Standing Patrols
• Ambush (anti-armour and anti-personnel)
• Fighting Patrol
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-11

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
RECCE
7 phase operation:
Phase 1 Prelim Mov.

Phase 2 Route Out (incl cfm and occupation of FRV).
Phase 3 Action in FRV.
Phase 4 Action on Obj.
Phase 5 Wdr (to FRV).
Phase 6 Route back.
Phase 7 Extraction.
1. Prelim Mov 2. Route Out 3. Action In

Method of move Nav (explain route card) Admin
Load plan OOM Final brief
Time of: Fmn Sig to mov
Rehs Arcs Action On En
Leaving base RV drills
Action at Stop Short
Out
Cfm and occupation:
Route to DOP
Of FRV
Loc of DOP Action On:
Arcs En pre-seen
OOM Contact/IED
Action On: Obs
Ambush POWs
Breakdown Cas
at DOP Separated
on en Lost
4. Action on Obj
Rece Gp Cover Gp FRV Protection Gp
Composn Composn Composn

Tasks Tasks Task
Posn Posn Arcs
Route in Route in Sig to open fire
OOM OOM Action On:
Fmns Fmns Contact
Action On: Action On: Recce Gp contacted
Contact Contact En
Loc by En Loc by En pre-seen
En pre seen En pre seen Gps not return
FRV gp contacted FRV gp contacted
by En by En
3-12 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
RECCE
5. Wdr to FRV 6. Route Back

Sig to wdr Nav (explain route card)
OOM OOM
Fmn Fmn
Action in FRV Arcs
Headcheck RV drills
Exchange of info Obs
Sig to mov out Snap Ambush before base
Action On: Action On:
Contact Contact
En pre seen En pre-seen
CPERS Cas
FRV moved Separated
Msn not achieved Lost
Cfm and occupation of
PUP
At Base
7. Extraction
Action in PUP Actions on:
Load plan En pre-seen
Route back Contact
Action at DOP Casualty
Action at base Snap ambush
Veh separated
Veh lost
Veh breakdown
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-13

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
OBSERVATION POSTS AND STANDING PATROLS
8 phase operation:
Phase 1 Prelim Mov.

Phase 2 Route Out.
Phase 3 Action in FRV (incl Initial recce).
Phase 4 Occupation.
Phase 5 Routine.
Phase 6 Wdr (to FRV).
Phase 7 Route back.
Phase 8 Extraction.
1. Prelim Mov 2. Route Out

Method of mov Nav (explain route card)
Load plan OOM
Rehearsals Fmns
RTM RV Drills
Time Out Obs drills
Route to DOP Loc of DOP Action at stop short
Arcs Cfm of FRV
Action at DOP Occupation of FRV
Sig to move Action On:
Action on: En pre seen
Breakdown Contact
Veh ambush IED
Air Attack Cas
En at DOP Lost
Separated
3. Action in FRV (Incl Initial Recce)

Action in FRV Def Soak Period Admin (incl prep construction kit)
Recce Gp FRV Protection Gp

Composn Composn
Tasks Tasks
Priorities (Main/ Mutual sp OP) Arcs
OOM, Fmn, route, arcs Sig to open fire
Time on task Action On:
Sig to open fire En pre seen
Action On: Loc by en
En pre seen Recce gp contacted
Recce Gp contacted No rtn of Recce gp
FRV gp contacted Rtn of Recce grp
Cas
Task not achieved/ no comms
Rtn to FRV
3-14 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
4. Occupation
Main OP Mutual Sp OP/Admin Area
Composn Composn
Route Route
OOM, fmns, arcs OOM, fmns, arcs
Action on arrival at OP loc Action on arrival at Mutual
Construction tasks (sentry, comd, Sp OP/ Admin Area loc Construc-
obs) tion tasks
Loc of ERV (sentry, comd, obs)
Action on: Loc of ERV
En pre seen Action on:
Contact En pre seen
Mutual Sp OP/ Admin Contact
Area contacted Main OP contacted
5. Routine
Main OP Mutual Sp OP/Admin Area
Reporting As per main OP if applicable
Changeover system
(observe-sentry-rest-admin) Actions On
Tasks of:
Observer Contact/ Compromise:
Sentry Main Op
Admin Mutual Sp OP/ Admin
Rest Area
State of eqpt Changeover between Ops
Observer eqpt (day/ night) Lost comms
Sentry eqpt and wpns
Feeding
Latrines
Rubbish
Resupply system
6. Withdrawal (to FRV) 7. Route Back

Sig to wdr (for main OP and mutual Nav (explain route card)
Sp OP/ Admin Area)
Collapse of OP eqpt and defs OOM

OOM, route, fmns, arcs Fmns
Act in FRV (brief lead scout etc) RV Drills
Sig to mov out Obs drills
Action On: Action at stop short/PUP
Contact Action at base
En pre seen Action On:
En follow up En pre seen
Eqpt lost Contact
Cas
Lost Separated
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-15

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
8. Extraction
Load plan En pre-seen
Route back Contact
Action at DOP Cas
Action at base Snap ambush
Veh separated
Veh lost
Veh breakdown
3-16 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ANTI-PERSONNEL AMBUSH
9 phase operation:
Phase 1 Prelim Movs.

Phase 2 Route out.
Phase 3 Action in FRV (incl initial recce).
Phase 4 Occupation.
Phase 5 Routine.
Phase 6 Action on Enemy.
Phase 7 Action on Ambush not sprung.
Phase 8 Route Back.
Phase 9 Extraction.

Method of mov Nav (see Route Card)
Load plan Seating plan OOM
Rehearsals Fmns
RTM RV drills
Time out Obs drills
Route to DOP Loc of DOP Arcs Action at stop short
Action at DOP Cfm of FRV Occ of FRV
Sig to move Actions On: Action On:
Breakdown En pre seen Contact
Veh ambush Cas
Air attack Lost
En at DOP
IED
Separated
3. Action in FRV (incl Initial Recce)

Action in FRV
Def
Soak Period
Def Admin (inc prep construction kit)

Composn Composn
Tasks Tasks
Sig to mov Arcs
Route Sig to open fire
OOM Actions On:
Fmns En pre seen
Arcs Loc by en
Time on task Recce gp contacted
Sig to open fire Non rtn of Recce gp
Actions On: Rtn of Recce gp
Contact
En pre seen
FRV Gp contacted
Cas
Task not achieved
Sig/RTn to FRV
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-17

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
4. Occupation
Method of Entry Preparation:
Route Indiv Posns (Arcs, Cam,
OOM Digging)
Fmns Claymore (comd initiated only)
Arcs Veh obs (for anti armr)
Posn of Gps: Lts
Comd Gp Defs
Killing Gp Line
Cut Offs Sig for Ambush Set
LMG State of Wpns
LAW Gp (for anti-armr) Action On:
Action when in Posn (Soak
En pre seen
Period)
Contact
5. Routine (if applicable)

Roster Meals
Relief System Latrine
State of Eqpt Rubbish
Rest
6. Action on Enemy 7. Action on ambush not

sprung
Wng from Cut-Offs Sig to Abort
Sig to remainder Mines/Defs/Illum
Sigs to spring: Retrieval
Claymores Action while retrieving
(comd initiated only) Eqpt:
Illum Cut Offs
Grenades Killer Gp
Sigs for: Sig to Wdr
Watch and Shoot OOM
Cease-fire Fmn
Searchers Action in FRV
Search Procedure
Headcheck
Wdr to FRV:
Exchange of info
Sig
Sig to mov out
Route
Action On:
OOM
Action in FRV Contact
Actions On: En pre seen
En Counter/flank attack En follow up
Approach of Civs CPERS
Cas FRV moved
CPERS Eqpt lost
Fire plan:
Comd Gp
LAW Gp
LMG Gp
3-18 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
8. Route Back
Nav Actions On:
OOM Contact
Fmn Cas
Arcs Separated
RV drills Lost
En pre-seen Cfm of PUP
Obs At Base
Snap Ambush before base
9. Extraction
Action in PUP Action at Base Veh Separated
Load Plan Actions On: Veh Lost
Route Back En pre-seen Veh Breakdown
Action at DOP Contact
Snap Ambush Cas
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-19

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ANTI-ARMOUR AMBUSH
9 phase operation:
Phase 1 Prelim Mov.
Phase 2 Route Out.
Phase 3 Action in FRV (incl Initial recce).
Phase 4 Occupation.
Phase 5 Routine.
Phase 6 Action on Enemy.
Phase 7 Action on Ambush not sprung.
Phase 8 Route Back.
Phase 9 Extraction.
c. Tasks. (for each Gp, if required)
d. Phases.
PRELIM MOV ROUTE OUT
Method of mov Load plan Nav (see Route Card)

Rehearsals OOM
RTM Fmns
Time Out RV drills
Route to DOP Obs drills
Loc of DOP Action at stop short
Arcs Cfm of FRV
Action at DOP Occ of FRV
Sig to move Action On:
Action on En pre seen
Breakdown Contact
Veh ambush Cas
Air Attack Lost
En at DOP Separated
IED
3-20 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ANTI-ARMOUR AMBUSH
ACTION IN FRV (INCL INITIAL RECCE)
Action in FRV
Def
Soak Period
Admin (incl prep construction kit)
Composn Composn
Tasks Tasks
Sig to mov Arcs
OOM Action On:
Fmns En pre seen
Arcs Loc by en
Sig to open fire No rtn of Recce gp
Actions On: Rtn of Recce grp
Contact
En pre seen
FRV Gp contacted
Cas
Task not achieved
Sig/RTn to FRV
OCCUPATION
Method of Entry Preparation:

Route Indiv Posns
OOM (Arcs, Cam, Digging)
Fmns Veh obs
Arcs Lts
Posn of Gps: Defs
Comd Gp Line
LAW Gp Sig for Ambush Set
LSW Offs State of Wpns
Action when in Posn Action On:
(Soak Period) En pre seen
Contact
ROUTINE (if applicable)
Roster Meals
Relief System Latrine
State of Eqpt Rubbish
Rest
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-21

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ANTI-ARMOUR AMBUSH
ACTION ON ENEMY
Wng from Cut-Offs Sig for Cease-fire

Sig to remainder Wdr to FRV:
Sigs to spring: Sig
LAW/ATk wpns Route
Claymores Gps order of wdr
(comd initiated only) Action in FRV
Illum Actions On:
Grenades Wpns failure
Fire Plan: En Counter/flank attack
Comd Gp Approach of Civs
LAW Gp Cas
LSW Gp CPERS
ACTION ON AMBUSH NOT SPRUNG
Sig to Abort Headcheck

Defs;/Illum Retrieval Exchange of info
Action while retrieving Eqpt Sig to mov out
Comd Gp Action On:
LAW Gp Contact
LSW Gp En pre seen
Sig to Wdr En follow up
OOM CPERS
Fmn FRV moved
ROUTE BACK
Nav Obs Cas

OOM Snap Ambush before Separated
Fmn base Lost
Arcs Actions On: Cfm of PUP
RV drills Contact At Base
En pre-seen
EXTRACTION
Action in PUP Action at Base Veh Separated

Load Plan Actions On: Veh Lost
Route Back En pre-seen Veh Breakdown
Action at DOP Contact
Snap Ambush Cas
3-22 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIGHTING PATROL/RAID
7 phase operation:
Phase 1 Prelim Movs.

Phase 2 Route out.
Phase 3 Action in FRV (incl initial recce).
Phase 4 Action on objective.
Phase 5 Withdrawal (to FRV).
Phase 6 Route back.
Phase 7 Extraction.
Method of mov Nav (see Route Card)

Load plan, seating plan OOM
Rehearsals Fmns
RTM RV drills
Time out Obs drills
Route to DOP Action at stop short
Loc of DOP Cfm of FRV
Arcs Occ of FRV
Action at DOP Action On:
Sig to move En pre seen Contact
Actions On: Cas
Breakdown
Lost
Veh ambush
IED
Air attack
Separated
En at DOP
3. Action in FRV (incl Initial Recce)
Confirmatory Orders
Def
Soak Period
Def Admin (inc prep construction kit)
Composn Composn
Tasks Tasks
Sig to mov Arcs
OOM Actions On:
Fmns En pre seen
Arcs Loc by en
Sig to open fire Non rtn of Recce gp
Actions On: Rtn of Recce gp
Contact
En pre seen
FRV Gp contacted
Cas
Task not achieved
Sig/RTn to FRV
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-23

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIGHTING PATROL/RAID
4. Action on Obj
Cover/Fire Sp Gp Asslt Gp FRV Protection Gp
Composn Composn Composn

Tasks Task Task
Posn Posns Posn
Route Route Arcs
OOM Fmn Action on:
Fmns Fire plan Loc by en
Arcs Action on eff en fire: Other gps not rtn
Pri of tgts (By sect; sigs, Other gps contact
Opening fire bounds, mov/action, Rtn of gps
Action On: arcs) Gp not rtn
Contact (By fr tm; sigs,
Loc by En bounds, mov/action,
Separarted arcs)
Actions on en posn:
LOE
Searching plan
5. Withdrawal (to FRV) 6. Route Back
Sig to wdr Nav (explain route card)

OOM, route, fmns, arcs OOM
Act in FRV (brief lead scout etc) Fmns
Arcs
Headcheck RV Drills
Exchange of info Obs drills
Sig to mov out Snap ambush before base
Action On: Action On:
Contact En pre seen
En pre seen Contact
En follow up Cas
CPERS
Lost Separated
FRV moved
Cfm and occupation of PUP
Eqpt lost
At base
7. Extraction

Load Plan En pre-seen
Route Back Contact
Action at DOP Cas
Snap Ambush Snap ambush
Veh Separated
Veh Lost
Veh Breakdown
3-24 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DEMOLITION GUARD
Demolition Guard
Timings Mov Coord of Fire Fire Plan
Recce Recce Pty Pris Arty
State 1 Assy Area Con Mors
State 2 Rel Pt Arcs DFs/FPF
Complete No vehs Tgt Areas Smoke AD
Obs by…. Fwd of …. Adjustments
CAS
Avn
Deception/Sy LOs Seniority Safety

Distances
Screen Details HQ Dml to:
Track plan Loc Dml firing CP
STAP Comms Pty Trenches
Trench RF hazard
C Surv
Measures
Sentries
Ptls (inc bank
ptls)
Check Pt Rd Block/ Refugees Rec

Loc TC pt Con pt On dml
Comd Loc Loc Loc:
Comd Comd Rec veh
Altn Route ARV
Tasks
Orders for wdr Fd Def CBRN C Movs

Veh Mining States NTM trace
Ammo Cratering Detection
Lanes Wiring Plans
Routes Anti-hel obs Alarms
Loc asslt boats Stores RV Reporting
Trenches Contamination
Pri of work Con
Actions on: Attack (en, recce, Action on: CPERS, Civ

LLAD)
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-25

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
BREACHING AND OBSTACLE CROSSING
Breaching and Obstacle Crossing
Timings Prelim Mov X-ings
H hr Assy area Water Minefield
Banks secure FUP X-ing site Breach site
X complete Routes Boat off load Waiting area
Ech x-ing OOM Boat prep area OOM with:
Waiting area Pris
OOM with: AVRE
Pris Python
AVLBs ARVs
ARVs Dozers
Con Measures Coord of Fire Fire Plan Surprise and

Security
LD Pris Arty STAP
Bdys Con Mors Flank guard
Report lines Arcs DFs/FPF Bank posts
Lanes Tgt areas Smoke C Surv
TC Adjustment Measures
Z-muster Anchor OP Deception
Guides CAS
OPSEC Avn
RoE AD
Appropriate/
Proportionate
CBRN Recce Limitations Actions on
States CPERS
Alarms Civ
Contamination
Detection plans
Reporting
Con
3-26 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
HOUSE CLEARING
House Clearing.
Timings Asslt of House Clearance of House
Mov to assy area Sig to asslt Comd gp
Mov to FUP Entry pt Asslt gp 1
HHr Entry action Asslt gp 2
Obj secure Sig to room clear Cover gp
Action on failed entry
Control Measures Bdys Routes

Sectors Report lines Bounds
House numbers Resup/MEDEVAC RoE
Axis OPSEC
Fire Plan
Indirect Direct
Pris Pris
Arty Organic wpns
Mors Appropriate/
Proportionate
House Clear Obs Action On

Sig Loc CPERS
Re-org Responsibility Civ
Arcs IED
Link man
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-27

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
CONVOYS AND ESCORTS
Convoys and Escorts.
Timings Assy Area Routes Mov
H Hr Loc To LD Route signing
RTM Action in LD to rel pt Packets
ETA From rel pt OOM
Complete by Speed
Spacing
Halts Rel pt Actions on Co-ord of Fire

Loc Loc Ambush Pris
Timings Action at Rd blocks Con
Actions at Air attack Arcs
Lost Tgt areas
For detour
By-pass
CPERS
Civ
IED
VP
Breakdown
Split Convoy
Separation
Fire Plan Surprise/Sy CBRN

Arty Sentries Measures on
Mors STAP Detour
Tgt lists/DF C surv measures States
Appropriate/ Deception Detection plans
Proportionate Alarms
Reporting
3-28 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
VEHICLE CHECK POINTS
Vehicle Check Points
Timings CIVPOL
Duration Tasks
Time on / off Loc
RoE Con measures

EoF Legal powers
Use of computers
Deception and security Docs

Sentries Veh search certificate
Decoy VCPs Clearance certificate
STAP Wanted pers (list/photos)
C surv measures Stolen car lists
CBRN Actions on
States Attack
Detection plans Avoidance of VCP
Alarms Breaking through VCP
Reporting CPERS
Contamination con Civ
Search Eqpt Reg’d

Area layout Caltrops
Searchers Torch
Markers
Cones
Search Eqpt
Danger Light
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-29

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AVIATION OPERATIONS
Timings
• Initial Chalk Parade • Final Chalk • Y-hr (depart

• Day/Night Rehearsal Parade staging HLS)
• Met Check • Emplane • L-hr (arrive drop-
off HLS)
Chalk Parades
Initial Final Rehearsal

• Timing / Loc • Timing / Loc • Day / Night -
• Kit / Equip • Kit / Equip Time / Loc.
• Layout • Layout • Emplane /
• Chalk Commanders • Chalk deplane drills
Commanders • Actions On
• Bump Plan
Tactical Load Plan
• Rigging and Marking • Manifesting • Must Go loads

USL (timings loc) (marking)
Bump Plan
Go / No Go Criteria
Actions On
Actions At Staging HLS Actions on A/C Action on Drop-off

• IA • A/C failure (major HLS
• Briefing / minor) • Pri & Alt HLS
• Rte to Obj / HLS • Divert (alt HLS) • Hot (opposed)
• Landing Plan (direction • Abort Procedure HLS
of Ramp to Obj) • Lost comms with
• Loading overwatch.
• Bump Plan • Casualty
• Abort / Delay
RV Procedure
• Rally Grouping + • Actions on • Actions on

Marking Contact Casualty
• Loc RV + bearing + LOE
• Accounting &
• Reporting
3-30 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
AVIATION OPERATIONS
Control Measures
• LD • Report lines • OPSEC

• Axis • LOE • RoE
• Bdys
Fire Plan
Pris Tgt list Avn

• Arty • Fire units mov • AD
• Mors • Pris • ISTAR
• Anchor OP • Organic wpns • Appropriate/
• Adjustment • CAS Proportionate
• SEAD
Ground Tactical Plan – as per mission orders
Extraction Plan
• HLS
• ERV
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 3-31

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
3-32 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 4
ACTIONS

Content Pages
2 3 4 5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
BATTLEFIELD DISCIPLINE
• The commander sets and maintains the standard. If battlefield
discipline is poor, it’s his fault.
• Lead by example.
• Don’t assume; check.
• Be inquisitive and sceptical. If it doesn’t look right to you, it almost
certainly isn’t. Investigate and rectify!
• Equipment should be kept as close to immediate readiness as
security and sustainability allows.
• Think about how you check: inspections, delegation of specific areas
to subordinates.
• Hold subordinate commanders accountable for poor discipline, as
well as the individual.
• Do not conduct field checks of battlefield discipline as a ‘tick list’;
don’t ‘go through the motions’.
• The enforcement of battlefield discipline demands energy, diligence
and moral courage from the commander.
Appearance and Eqpt Carriage:

• Are troops smart and presentable?
• Does the image presented by the troops support the higher
commander’s intent?
• Dress and eqpt conforming to NTM?
• Med eqpt (FFD/CAT/Morphine) carried as per SOP.
• Troops briefed on weapon and eqpt carriage (NTM)?
• Where threat dictates, weapon and ammunition within arm’s reach?
Hygiene and Personal Maintenance:

• Washed and shaved?
• Feet washed, dried, powdered, toenails cut?
• Fresh socks on?
• Hands washed prior to eating?
• Exposed skin covered?
• Malaria tablets taken?
• Rest routine? Troops resting as soon as essential admin completed?
• Are troops drinking enough?
• Are troops replenishing water when they can?
• Latrine arrangements effective and understood?
• Is everyone observing latrine arrangements?
• Is litter collected and disposed of correctly?
• ID disks worn around the neck?
• Dressing appropriately (warm kit removed prior to exertion)?
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-1

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Protection:
• Sentries posted, alert and concealed?
• Sentries able to cover all en approaches?
• Sentries properly briefed (password, challenge, actions on?)
• PPE (body armour, helmets, eye protection) worn?
• Are body armour collar and cuffs worn when static?
• Can sentries raise the alarm effectively and, if the tactical
situation dictates, silently?
• Drills for ECM on and off being observed?
• ECM serviceable and positioned to maintain max ‘bubble’?
• ECM removed when static to allow fire position?
• Clearance patrols conducted?
• Guns laid on FPF?
• Are fire hazards minimized?
• Are troops carrying out C-IED drills on halting?
• Troops dispersed when static?
• Troops adopting a concealed fire position when static?
• Troops able to engage effectively with their weapons when
static?
Equipment Serviceability:
• Weapons clean, serviceable and ready for immediate use?
• Gas regulator correctly fitted?
• Ammunition serviceable?
• Boots dried and polish applied?
• Radios and ancils clean, properly stowed and cared for?
• Radio on correct frequency?
• NVS equipment clean and cared for?
• NVS fitted at last light, removed at first light?
• Spare batteries fully charged and available?
• Spent batteries recharged immediately?
• Is ground sign left unnecessarily?
4-2 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Situational Awareness:
• Is the Notice to Move state clear and understood?
• Does everyone know the likely direction and nature of the
threat?
• Have all been briefed and rehearsed in the ‘Actions On’?
• Does everyone know the location of the ERV and hard
cover?
• Does everyone know the likely future tasks and the ‘No
• Move Before’ time?
• Are the locations of other friendly force positions known?
• Does everyone know the locations of claymores and
tripflares?
• Are range cards made out for static positions?
• Are range cards readable and useful?
Concealment and OPSEC:

• Camouflage effective?
• Light discipline observed?
• No unnecessary movement or noise?
• Track plan observed?
• Radio discipline observed (i.e. no ‘click and blow’)?
• Documentation and personal letters disposed of correctly?
• Mobile phone policy being obeyed?
Vehicles:
• First parade checks being conducted?
• Vehicles refuelled and restored to operating capability
immediately on return from task?
• Vehicle keys immediately available?
• Vehicles parked up to allow immediate re-deployment?
• Cargo and equipment correctly stowed, presenting no
secondary hazard in event of explosion?
• Troops wearing seatbelts/harness?
• Is the LS kept clear of FOD?
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-3

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
SECTION BATTLE DRILLS
Battle Drill Considerations

• Battle Preparation
• Protection
• Ammunition
• Weapons
• Personal Camouflage
• Equipment
• Radios
• Specialist Equipment
• Orders
• Reaction to effective en fire

• Return Fire
• Take Cover
• Return Appropriate Fire
• Locating the Enemy

• Observation
• Fire
• Movement
• Suppressing the Enemy

• WIN THE FIREFIGHT – Concentrate accurate fire
• Fire Control Order
• Group
• Range
• Indication
• Type of Fire
• Full / Brief / Individual / Delayed
• The Attack
• QBOs
• Approach
• Assault
• Fight Through
• Momentum
• Maximum use of weapons
• Control
• One foot on the ground
• Exploitation
4-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Regroup
• Protection
• Ammunition
• Casualties
• Equipment
• Searchers
• SITREP
• Digging
• Orders
TACTICAL CHECKLIST
Vehicle Checks
Internal stowage External stowage

First Parade Running gear
Primary and secondary wpn systems Comds/Gnrs Primary sight
ECM Seatbelts
Armour systems functioning correctly
Personal Camouflage Concealment
Helmet scrimmed Fire positions

Exposed skin camouflage Observation
Clothing and equipment Cover
Weapons and equipment usable Trench dimensions
Maintenance of camouflage Observation of arcs
Use of shadow Engagement of enemy
Track discipline
Hide drills/discipline
Weapons Clothing and Equipment
Carriage Correct dress

Correct ammo scales Webbing fits properly
Prepared and loaded sights Ammo readily available
Optical sights checked Equipment packed
Serviceable and clean correctly and noiseless Items
GPMG settings/balance carried as per SOP
Ancillaries and cleaning kit Ancillary equipment secure
Disinfectant
Body Bags
Signals CBRN
Equipment serviceability, battery Clothing and equipment

state, spares frequencies, Knowledge of CBRN situation
address gps Callsign Respirators checked
Correct signals instructions Immediate action and
Security and carriage decontamination drills
Radios properly manned CBRN sentries
Comms Black Spots Nuclear observer
Comms devices
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
OFFENSIVE ACTIONS
Types of Offensive Action:
• QUICK/HASTY ATTACK - Exploit/Destroy/Defeat

• DELIBERATE ATTACK - Destroy/Defeat
• COUNTER/SPOILING ATTACK - Disrupt
• RAID - Disrupt
• EXPLOITATION - Destroy/Defeat
• PURSUIT - Exploit/Clear
• FEINT - Distract (through combat)
• DEMONSTRATION - Distract (without combat)
• RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE - Reveal
• AMBUSH - Disrupt
• BREAKOUT OF ENCIRCLED FORCES - Defeat
• INFILTRATION - Find/Defeat
Principles of Offensive Actions:
• Surprise
• Security
• Seize key terrain (or targets vital to influencing perceptions)
• Concentration of fire
• Manoeuvre
• Plan to exploit success
• Simplicity
Attacking Cohesion and Will:
• Surprise
• Do something or get there before the enemy (pre-emption)
• Prevent the enemy from working as a team (Dislocation)
• Disruption
• Shock action
• Destruction
Enhanced by:
• Simplicity
• Flexibility
• Tempo
• Momentum
• Simultaneity (Actions occurring at the same time)
4-6 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
DEFENSIVE ACTIONS
Mission Verb: To DEFEAT or DETER a threat in order to
provide the right circumstances for offensive action. Depending
on what size of formation/unit is defending, defend can include
DELAY, HOLD, DENY and ATTACK.
Principles:
• Depth
• Absorbs enemy momentum
• All Round Defence

• Defend against electromagnetic spectrum
• 3 Dimensional battlespace
• STAP CSCM
• Mutual Support
• Posns must be able to have an effect on each other
• Correct sighting of Direct Fire Wpn Systems
• Fill gaps with ISTAR
• Reserves/Striking Forces
• Reserve and Counter Attack plans
• Offensive Action
• Defence is undertaken to set conditions for offence
• Seize initiative and force enemy to comply with the
defensive plan
• Aggressive patrolling
• Deception and Concealment

• Deception measures
• Nuisance minefields
• Booby traps
• Decoys
• Correct de-turfing
• Concealed spoil
• Track discipline
• EMCON discipline
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-7

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Stages of Defence:
• Preparatory Stage
• Covering Force Action
• Battle Handover
• Main Defensive Battle
• Employment of Reserves
• Factors:
• Administration
• Communications
• Intelligence
• Concentration of Combat Power
• Manoeuvre
• Rehearsals
• Liaison
• Active Security:
• Establish OPs
• Deploy Patrols
• Deploy Early Warning Devices
• Deploy CBRN Alarm Equipment
• Deploy Ground/Air Sentries
• Passive Security:
• Disperse Vehicles and Troops
• Use Cam/Concealment/Cover
• Impose Radio Silence
• Turn Off Heat Sources
• Reduce Noise
• No Movement on Position
• Use no Lights
• Keep Antennas low
• Use Defilade Positions
• Do not use likely Arty targets
4-8 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Terminology:
• Vital Ground. Ground whose loss would make the defence
untenable.
• Key Terrain. Terrain or feature that offers marked advantage to
whoever holds it.
• Primary Position. Main position from which unit intends to fight.
• Secondary Position. Completely new position, normally prepared
and at least recce’d, to which unit moves once primary position is
untenable or ineffective.
• Alternative Position. Position in immediate area to which an
element may move onceb located to continue engagement.
• Countermoves. Actions undertaken in reaction to or in anticipation
of en moves (i.e. a ‘spoiling attack’).
• Counterattack. Action to recapture lost ground or destroy an enemy
(capitalizing on his disorder during the assault).
• Blocking Position. Def posn so sited as to deny en access to a
given area or prevent his advance in a given direction.
• Defensive Fire (DF). Pre-arranged Indirect or GPMG(SF) fire to
assist and protect a unit engaged in a def action. DF in Depth; Close
DF; Priority DF.
• Final Protective Fire (FPF). DF target to cover most vulnerable
approaches, usually close to a position. Should be pre-adjusted.
• Enfilade/Defilade. A defilade position hides from en observation
and direct fire and allows engagement of enemy flank (enfilade fire).
• Interlocking Fire. Weapon arcs from neighbouring positions link
together.
• Overlapping Fire. Weapon fields of fire cover complete frontage of
neighbouring positions.
• Beaten Zone. Ellipse-shaped ‘Cone of fire’ formed when rounds
from automatic weapon hit ground. Size varies with range and shape
of ground.
Forces and Tasks:

• Armour - Gd Force, Anti-Armour, Mobile Reserve, Screen Force.
• ISTAR - Screen - Flanks, Gaps in MDP, assist in movement, tag and
track enemy penetration.
• Infantry - Hold Ground, Anti-Armour Plan (JAV/NLAW).
• OS - Fire Plan, Illum, DF’s, FPF, Deception, Destruction.
• Engineers - Terrain Analysis, Obstacle Plan, Mobility / Counter
Mobility.
• Aviation - Coordination with covering Troops.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-9

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
DELAY
Concept: An Operation in which a force under pressure trades
space for time by slowing down the enemy’s momentum and inflicting
maximum damage on the enemy without becoming decisively engaged.
Principles:
• Intelligence. Determine Enemy Main Effort.

• Manoeuvre.
• Avoid decisive engagements
• Maximum use of firepower
• Disengage using covered withdrawal routes
• Terrain.
• Use of natural obstacles to canalise enemy
• Maximise fields of fire
• Use ground which enables easy disengagement
• Time. Consider time to prepare and time required to delay.
• Space. Depth of the delay is closely related to time.
• Aggressive Action.
• Force enemy to deploy and manoeuvre
• Constant harassing leads to a caution/slow enemy advance
• Balance. Essential to enable effective defence, disengagement and
withdrawal.
• Security and Protection. Avoid being surprised or decisively
engaged.
• Deception. Reduces vulnerability during withdrawal.
Delay Position Selection:

• Natural obstacles on the front and flanks
• Long range observation and fields of fire
• The longest delay with the fewest forces
• Cover and Concealment for delaying forces
• Covered and concealed routes of withdrawal
• Sufficient distance between successive positions to require the
enemy to re-organise before attacking the next position
Characteristics:
• Force Enemy to deploy and manoeuvre
• Make maximum use of obstacles
• Maintain contact with the enemy
• Avoid decisive engagements
4-10 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Types:
• Delay from Successive Positions (Caterpillar)
• Delay from Alternate Positions (Leapfrog)
Considerations:
• IPB
• Delay position selection
• Employment of Snipers
• Obstacle plan
• Siting of Anti-Armour weapons (prevent penetration)
• Disengagement - once maximum delay has been achieved
• Breaking Contact - if threatened with serious engagement
Control Measures:
• Phase lines
• Report lines
• Checkpoints
• Battle positions and sectors
• Engagement areas and target reference points
• Assembly areas, MSRs and CSS points
• Coordinating points
• Routes and lanes
Forces and Tasks:

• Armour - Maximise Firepower and Mobility from pre-recced blocking
positions
• STAR - Screen - Flanks, assist in movement, tag and track enemy
penetration
• Infantry - Block using a series of defensive positions
• OS - Slow down enemy advance, interdict follow on forces, support
disengagement of friendly forces
• Engineers - Terrain Analysis, Obstacle Plan, Mobility/Counter
Mobility
• Aviation - Augment anti-armour and OS plan
Conduct:
• Recce
• Delaying Force Action
• Disengagement
• Reserve Tasks
• Breaking Contact
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-11

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
PATROLLING
Aims of Patrolling:
• Obtain Information
• Destroy/Disrupt Enemy
• Deter en activity in area beyond influence of static positions and in
gaps between units
• Reassure the local Population (especially women and children)
Principles of Patrolling:
• All round protection
• Deception
• Mutual Support (depth)
• Appropriate firepower
• Communications
• Robust and rehearsed actions on
• Absorb and exploit information
Types of Patrol:
• Reconnaissance Patrol
• Standing Patrol
• Fighting Patrol
• Reassurance Patrol
• Clearance Patrol
Patrol Sequence:
• Receive Wng O and Comd’s Brief
• Mission Analysis and Time Appreciation
• Ptl Comd’s Wng O
• Reconnaissance
• Plt Comd’s Orders
• Inspections
• Noisy Rehearsals
• Rest, Feeding, Admin, Prep
• Silent Rehearsals
• Final Checks
• Patrol Action
• Sharing of essential information in FRV
• Ptl Comd debriefs patrol
• Patrol Master debriefs Ptl Comd
• Write Patrol Report
4-12 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Considerations for Patrol Conduct:

• Operational Security (sanitise maps, notebooks personal letters etc)
• Fieldcraft
• Formations
• Radio (whisper/reporting etc)
• Routes and RV drills
• Navigation (see Brecon Nav Guide)
• Actions on
• Supporting Fire
• Control (Signals, FSCM, Report Lines, Codewords etc)
• Recording, Reporting, Debriefing
Reasons for Patrol Harbours:

• Base of Operations
• As a Rendez-Vous
• Secure Admin Area
Stages of Establishing a Patrol Harbour:

• Selection
Map
•
Air Photograph
•
Aerial Recce
•
Ground
•
• Occupation
Snap Ambush
•
Comd’s Recce
•
Guide Pl into Harbour
•
Stand-to
•
• Clearance Patrols
• Out through neighbours / In through own Sentry
• Looking for:
• Signs of recent enemy activity
• Possible enemy approach routes
• Unexpected obstacles
• Streams and dominating ground
• Possible ERV locations
• Sentries
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-13

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Work Routine:
• Stand-to posns
• Fields of Fire
• Shell Scrapes
• Warning Devices
• Comd Detonation Devices
• Track Plan
• Comms Cord / Line
• Shelters
• Orders / Brief
Siting Considerations:
• Mission
• Location:
• Defendable
• Covered/Concealed
• Away from civs and animals
• Near a water source
• Good routes in/out
• Good comms
• Near HLS
Routine Considerations:
• Future Operations
• Alarm and Stand-to system
• Orders for opening fire
• Sentry rota
• Resupply
• Sleeping and feeding
• Track discipline
• Staggered wpn cleaning
• Latrines
4-14 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
ADVANCE TO CONTACT
Purpose: Conducted to make or regain contact with an enemy under
the most favourable conditions. Usually conducted in preparation for a
subsequent operation.
Principles:
• Surprise
• Security
• Maintenance of Momentum
Considerations:
• Mission Command
• Balanced Groupings
• Anticipation at all Levels
• Boldness and Swift Reaction
• Sound Tactical Deployment
• Effective Employment of Fire Support Assets
• Boundaries
Methods of Movement:
• Travelling - Low Threat
• Travelling Overwatch - Medium Threat
• Bounding Overwatch - High Threat
Planning/Preparation
• Warning Order
• Screen/Guard Force
• Main Body
• Reserve
• Boundaries
• Limit of Exploitation
• Flanking Forces
• Timings
• NMB
• Routes
• Recce
• If allowed, from where?
• Enemy activity and own routes / possible positions
• Map recce essential
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-15

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Orders
• Enemy intent and likely COA
• Friendly Forces intent
• Flank protection
• Fire Support plan
• Formations: One-up, two-up, column or a mix dependent upon the

threat, terrain and intent
• Fire Support:
• Location of integral fire support assets
• Possible DF locations - position of MFC
• Ensure all movement conducted within footprint of all Fire
Support assets
• IPB / Ground:
• Ground Appreciation is the minimum
• IPB is to be conducted where possible
• Attachments:
• Plan to use attached arms - take advice on their use from
subject matter experts
• Provide security for attachments as required
Groupings:
• Guard/Cover Force
• Provides early warning, security and locates the enemy
• Suppresses and where poss destroys enemy encountered
• Main Body: Reacts to the situation based on the actions of either the
enemy or the guard force
• Reserve: Held back under control of the Pl Sgt in order to react to
any situation
• Platoon: All components of the platoon must be able to react to any
situation and be prepared to change into any role
Terminology:
• Axis of Advance - line of advance astride which a unit moves.

• Route - the prescribed course to be travelled from a specific point of
origin to a specific destination.
• Cleared Route - a route that must be cleared of enemy direct fire.
• Bound - a feature of tactical significance on or astride the axis which
could be held defensively if the need arose.
• Report Line - an easily recognizable feature, at right angles to
the axis, which is used to report progress. It need have no tactical
significance.
• Phase Line - a line used for the control and coordination of
operations and is usually a terrain feature extending across the zone
of action.
4-16 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
WITHDRAWAL
Principles:
• Flexibility
• Simplicity
• Offensive Action
• Information
• Maintenance of Morale
• Control
• Secrecy
Objectives:
• To avoid defeat
• To avoid battle in an unfavourable situation
• To draw the enemy onto favourable ground
• To conform to flanking formations
• To reform forces
• For CSS reasons
Groups:
• Security Force
• Main Body
• Reserves
General Characteristics:
• Normally conducted under adverse conditions
• Enemy may have the initiative
• Vulnerable to air and ground attack
• Use cover of night or poor visibility
Planning Considerations:
• Enemy interference with operation to be minimised
• Emphasis on surprise and speed
• Security provision for withdrawing forces
• Protective elements must be organised and tasked in accordance
with the enemy capabilities
Planning Factors:
• Distance to be moved
• Weather
• Length of darkness
• Ground
• Use of obstacles
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-17

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Enemy strengths and mobility

• Situation on flanks
• Air situation
• CSS elements
Groupings:
• Main Body: Disengage either by stealth or concealment after
engagement
• Protective Force:
Prevent enemy engaging the main body
•
May need to conduct delaying operations
•
May need to be reinforced from the main body
•
May need to occupy an intermediate position
•
• Intermediate Position:
Must be strong enough to force the enemy to deploy
•
Make maximum use of obstacles and long range weapons
•
Should be far from both the new and original positions
•
• New Main Position:
Early preparation is important
•
Recce, Engineers deploy early to start battle procedure
•
• Movement:
Prep phase
•
Disengagement
•
Security Phase
•
• Key Timings:
Denial Time
•
No rearward movement before
•
Thinning out start
•
Final Abandonment
•
Clear of line time
•
• Characteristics:
• Rearward Recce
• Liaison
• Battle Handover
• Night Movement
• Deception to cover withdrawal
• Control Measures:
• Timings
• Routes
• CPs - Sect / Pl / Coy / BG / Bde
• RVs - Sect / Pl / Coy / BG / Bde
• Embussing Point
• Helicopter LS
4-18 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
RELIEF OF TROOPS
Purpose: To relieve all or part of a force in a sector by an incoming
unit/formation.
Reason:
• To replace an existing force which is depleted or exhausted
• To replace troops of one capability with troops of a difference
capability
• Routine rotation
Concept: Strong guard force deployed forward by the relieving
Principles:
• Surprise
• Security
Types:
• Relief in Place
• Forward Passage of Lines
• Rearward Passage of Lines
Methods:
• Sequential Relief
• Simultaneous Relief
Considerations:
• Clear Command Responsibility at all Stages
• Uninterrupted Surveillance of BG area
• Maintain Effective Fire Support Capability
• Maintain Mobile Reserve
• Employment of Support Weapons
• Battle Handover Line
• Relief Protected by Fighting Patrol Action
Command Considerations:
• Commanders Co-locate throughout the operation
• Command is transferred when 2 or more units or sub-units have
been relieved
• Once command passes, the incoming commander assumes
OPCOM of all outgoing units / sub-units not yet relieved
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-19

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Coordination Considerations: Superior HQ is responsible for:

• The timeframe for the operation
• Control lines
• Routes
• Liaison arrangements
• Recces
• Advance Parties
• Fire Support
• Overall Deception plan
• Tactical Air Support
• Airspace control
• Air Defence
• CSS
Control Measures:
• Debussing Point or LS
• Routes
• Waiting Areas
• CPs and RVs
• Guides
Factors:
• Security and Protection
• Early Liaison
• Allocation of Areas
• Allocation of Routes
• Timings
• Fire Support
• Command and Control
4-20 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
AMBUSHES
Ambush Tasks:
• DENY enemy patrols FREEDOM OF ACTION
• HARASS or DISRUPT enemy working parties
• DISTRACT enemy attention as part of a DECEPTION plan
Suitable Ambush Sites:

• Known or suspected enemy routes
• Admin areas, supply and water points
• Areas of marked change in vegetation
• Probable lines of enemy withdrawal
• Harbour/Defensive posn approaches
• Withdrawal routes from ambush sites
Ambush Principles:
• Sound Intelligence
Patrol Reports and OP Logs
•
Knowledge of the enemy
•
Surveillance Devices
•
BG G2
•
• Security
Force Protection
•
Flank Protection and depth
•
Risk of compromise?
•
• Surprise
Use of covered approaches
•
Minimal Movement
•
Personal Camouflage
•
Hard Routine
•
• Concentration of Firepower
• Simple plan for springing
• Maximise shock effect
• Claymores/IEDs/automatic weapons
• Wpn siting to maximise beaten zone
• Most firepower in the killing area
• Clear arcs and orders for opening fire
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-21

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Types:
• Deliberate
Planned
•
Prepared
•
Rehearsed
•
• Immediate
• Min planning
• Exploit situation
• Initiative and Simplicity
Ambush Groupings:
• Killing Group
• Cut off (Flank) Groups
• Rear Protection Group
• Indirect fires
• QRF/Reserve
Sequence of an Ambush
• Reconnaissance. BG G2, Patrol Reports, OP logs, etc
• Orders/Preparations/Rehearsals
• Detailed Actions-On (as per patrols)
• Type of ambush according to mission, comd’s intent, ground
and type of enemy
• Move to Ambush Site. Beware ground signs IVO ambush area
• Final Reconnaissance. Ambush Comd, Group Comds and Protection
• Confirmation. Comd’s Confirmatory Orders in FRV
• Occupation
• Final checks in FRV (prior to hard routine)
• Sequence - Cut-Offs, Killer Group, Rear Protection
• Work Routine - Claymores, tripflares, cam, comms, individual
posns
• Comds Checks and Ambush Set
• Lying in Ambush
Duration (Long / Short term)
•
Administration (Admin Area; Relief; Rotation; Feeding; 50/50
•
observation)
• Ambush Sprung
• Simple method of springing
• Full consideration of what will happen as the enemy enters
the KA
• Subsequent Action. Search policy in accordance with comd’s intent
(capture / disrupt / destroy?
• Follow Up Action. Is exploitation possible?
• Withdrawal. Opposite sequence to occupation
4-22 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
URBAN OPERATIONS
Characteristics:
• Restriction on Manoeuvre
• Restricted Fields of Fire and Observation
• Cover from View and Fire
• Difficulty in Locating Enemy
• Close Quarter Fighting
• Snipers
• Vehicle Movement
• Supporting Arms
• Communications
• Civilians
• Devastation
• CBRN
• Combat Supplies
• Casualties
Offensive Urban Operations:

Phases:
• Investment
Provide Int of enemy dispositions
•
Prevent enemy withdrawal
•
Prevent enemy reinforcements
•
Support break-in with direct/indirect
•
• Break-In
• Establish foothold on edge of built-up area
Seize key objective that dominates area
•
Establish routes for forward passage of lines
•
Determine strength/condition of the enemy
•
Be prepared to provide fire support
•
• Securing Objectives:
• CONSOLIDATE foothold from which to attk subsequent ob-
jectives or unhinge EF. Clear systematically. Maint SA with
Flanking Forces and Balance.
• Seize Objectives and Key Terrain
• Seize Initiative and Deny EF FoM
• Neutralise EF Defended locations
• Block EF Wdrl and LoC
• Neutralise EF Reserves and C2 nodes
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-23

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Clearance: CLEARANCE by Sectors to DEFEAT EF and CAPTURE

Strong Points.
• Reorganisation: EXPLOIT to LoE. MEDEVAC. Process CPERS
Conduct Resup and Redistribution. Prevent Reinfiltration. Counter
threats. Regroup for subsequent tasks. DEFEND.
ASSAULT – SUPPRESS – RESERVE
General Considerations:
• Simple Planning
• Combined arms
• Taskorg to lowest levels
• Control
• Thoroughness
• Momentum
• Covering Fire
• Resupply
• Firepower before manpower
Tactical Considerations:
• Beware Re-Infiltration
• Use Progress Markers
• 360° Battle
• Effectiveness of Snipers
Control Measures:
• Sectors (colour code)
• Bounds and Report Lines
• Boundaries
• Collection Points
• Nick numbers
Defensive Urban Operations:

Forces:
• Perimeter Force
• Early warning
• Destroy enemy recce
• Force enemy deployment
• Disrupt enemy break-in
• Deceive
• Cover obstacles
4-24 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
• Disruption Force:
• Enemy attrition
• Disrupt attack
• Delay enemy
• Remain highly mobile
• Offensive spirit
• Ambushes
• Confuse/Deceive
• Main Defensive Area:

• Defend localities
• Destroy enemy
• Break up enemy momentum
• Prevent break-out
• Cover Killing Areas
• Central Reserve:
• Centrally located and mobile
• Destroy enemy penetration
• Counter-attack and reinforce
General Considerations:
• Obstacle Plan (Allow/Dictate Manoeuvre)
• Civilian Population
• Logistics (maintain momentum)
• Offensive Action (disrupt/dislocate)
• Use of Patrols/Snipers
• Perimeter Force must not be Fixed
• Disruption (Tank-hunts/ambushes)
• Counter-Attack with Reserves
• Strong Points
Tactical Considerations:
• Defensive Principles
• Beware Re-Infiltration
• Use Progress Markers
• Civilian Population
• 360° Battle
• Effectiveness of Snipers
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-25

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Flag System:
RED Entry Point (not clear/secure)
GREEN Entry Point (clear/secure)
YELLOW Casualty/Med Sp
BLUE Booby traps/Engr Sp
Material Protection:
• Earth Parapet 1.5m
• Clay Parapet 1.8m
• Sand/loose (between boards) 0.75m
• Brick/rubble (between boards) 0.45m
• Brickwork 0.45m
• Concrete 0.3m
• Mild steel plate 4cm
• Timber 1.5m
• Sandbags - Rubble 0.75m
• Sandbags - Earth 0.75m
• Sandbags - Shingle 0.75m
• Sandbags - Sand 0.75m
STORES NEEDED FOR 100m BARBED WIRE OBS

Type of Dannert Barbed Post Fence Post Fence
Fence Concertinas Wire Reels Metal 1.8m Metal 0.6m
Low Wire -- 16 (200kg) - 220 (400kg)
Single
7 (160kg) 1 (13kg) 28 (150kg) --
Concertina
Triple
21 (480kg) 4 (50kg) 56 (300kg) --
Concertina
4-26 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
URBAN – TIPS
Avoid fighting in buildings if your mission can be achieved without doing

so (by-pass, isolate, dislocate).
If you have to enter, consider using shows of force and tactical call-outs
to gain access without fighting for it.
If you have to fight, use precision strikes and other direct fire platforms
- CR2, AH, Turret Weapons, Anti-Structure Munitions etc before
committing dismounts. Avoid man against man, drive the enemy out.
CS or smoke may also achieve this. Work to the ROE.
Use precision fires where possible to minimise collateral damage and
excessive rubblisation.
Avoid being engaged in a linear battle. Strike En in depth throughout to
fix him and prevent reinfiltration and isolation.
Methods of Entry (Breaching):
• Explosive (EMoE). Conducted by qualified RE or Asslt Pnrs. Usually

against a wall for unpredictability:
• Manual. Usually against a door or window:

• Shoulder, hand or foot
• Sledge hammer / ram
• Hooligan tool
• Crow bar
Top Down Entry: Consider the use of ladders to gain access to upper
(less well defended) floors or Avn to ‘land on’ or fast rope from.
Bldg Clearance:
• Rehearse Tm Drills
• Systematic Clearance
• Echelon
• Marksmanship
• Civilians
• RoE and CDE
• Communicate regularly
• Culmination / LoE
• Maint Balance and SA
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 4-27

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
ACTIONS
Safety: Safety LoEs to prevent Fratricide:
• Maint a Reserve
• Use Shadow
• Avoid Silhouette
• Rehearse CQB and Room Clearance Drills
• Consider spaces in-between bldgs
• Locate EF Strong Points and Reserve early
• Flank Protection
• Avoid Bunching
• Inf protect Engrs and Armr
4-28 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SECTION 5
CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS

Content Pages
2 3 4 5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
STATES OF READINESS
PERSONNEL AND VEHICLES

Readiness State/NTM Preparedness
Immediate Crews mounted, engines running, radios

on, weapons made safe, sentries in.
5 minutes Equipment loaded, engines off, no
camouflage but concealed, troops fully
equipped, sentries out.
15 minutes Equipment loaded, thermal camouflage
only, troops resting, sentries out.
30 minutes Equipment loaded, visual and thermal
camouflage, troops resting, sentries out,
urgent maintenance, cooking allowed.
1 hour Visual and thermal camouflage, sentries
out, maximum maintenance and rest.
2 hours Not to be employed on any tasks without
the authority of superior HQ, not to leave
base location. Undertake maintenance
and rest.
6 hours Allows recce and confirmation of task
prior to main body move, elements (e.g.
R Group) likely to be at reduced NTM,
troops may be deployed in local area,
troops may be re-tasked.
Notes:
1. If no specific mission is given (such as a reserve), then the NTM
refers to the time from when execution is ordered until when the
unit is to be ready to start deployment.
2. Changes to NTM must only be made within the existing notice
(e.g. a unit on 2 hours NTM can only be reduced to 15 minutes
NTM 1 hr 45 minutes hence).
3. Avn units conform to the same states of readiness for helicopter
use.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-1

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
HQs AND COMMANDS

STATES OF READINESS NOTICE TO MOVE
STATE
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
60 Minutes
Immediate
5 Minutes
2 Hours
Command Post
CP Fully Functional ● ● ● ●
Dismounted CP Fully Functional ● ● ● ●
Radio Stag from inside Vehicles ● ● ●
Primary Communications
Primary Antennas Deployed ● ● ● ● ●
Secondary Antennas Deployed ● ● ●
Antennas – Vehicles Whips Only ●
Alternate Communications
Line Laid as per Comms Plan ● ●
Company Line Plan in Place ● ● ●
Alternate Comms Plan In place ● ● ●
Line Only Within BG HQ ● ● ●
Power Plan
Charging as per EMCON Policy ● ● ● ● ● ●
Charging Engines Deployed ● ● ●
Generator Loaded ● ● ●
Camouflage
Cam and Thermal Fully Deployed ● ● ●
Only Thermal Sheets Deployed ● ●
Vehicles Concealed ● ● ● ● ● ●
Trailers Fitted to Vehicle ● ●
5-2 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Personnel and Equipment

Sentries Deployed ● ● ● ● ●
Stag Roster is Place ● ● ●
Admin for Non Employed Soldiers ● ● ●
Driver and all Crew Mounted ●
Vehicles Ready to Drive Off ●
Notes:
1. Immediate NTM should not be in force for more than 10
minutes.
2. On a low NTM state for an extended period, duty rosters for
personnel should be arranged.
3. HQ NTM require detailed rehearsal to ensure they are met
and that the HQ is stripped down in a logical manner retaining
key capability and functionality.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-3

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
COMMUNICATIONS
NO RADIO COMMS = NO COMMAND AND CONTROL, NO CASUALTY
EVACUATION, NO FIRE SUPPORT, NO SITUATIONAL AWARENESS, NO
REINFORCEMENT
• Fight for comms. Don’t give up until you get it.

• The radio probably isn’t broken.
• Look after your radio as you would your weapon.
• Check comms before you deploy.
• Have a lost comms plan.
Voice Procedure
• Think before you press the pressel.
• Keep it short and to the point.
• Speak in English, not false radio jargon.
• You project command through your radio manner and VP - take pride
in being good on the net.
• Avoid offering unless you have to.
• Don’t send long messages without breaks.
• Get to know the key callsigns by heart.
• Give some thought to the condition/situation of the recipient.
• Send short reverse sitreps when the opportunity presents itself to
maintain SA.
Troubleshooting
• Clear Mode. Check Frequencies match up.
• Secure Mode. Check presets, fixed frequency and comsec periods.
• All Modes.
• Use appropriate antenna (elevate with GSA if possible)
• Increase power setting
• Move to clear deadspot
• Vertically align gooseneck and antenna (esp if prone).
5-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Rules for Sighting Antenna (VLAMP)

• Vertical. Keep antenna vertical
• Line of Sight. Keep LoS to other stations.
• Avoid large objects, power lines, electric fences.
• Movement. A little movement may clear a dead spot.
• Position of the Antenna. It is the position of the antenna, not the set,
that matters.
LOST COMMS PROCEDURE

If BOWMAN VHF is the primary means:
• If you are mobile: STOP, 5/20m checks, check Comms eqpt,
go through lost comms procedure as if ECM was not present.
• Move posn, even a few metres can help. Try to gain height.
• Check connections and settings (See below).
• Improve your antenna/increase power, or separate VHF radio from
ECM BLUE by up to 40m.
• Try comms on HF net.
• Try comms on any other secure means you have.
• Use PMR to transmit UNCLASSIFIED message.
• Attempt to gain comms with nearest SF base.
• Switch to Theatre Movement or Air net.
• If Comms can still not be established, reconfirm 5/20m checks, turn
off ECM BLUE, and attempt to establish Comms. Once msg has
been passed turn ECM BLUE back on.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-5

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
COMBAT ID (Blue on Blue)

The timely identification of the nature of detected objects (vehicles,
persons etc) in combat to support an engagement decision.
Before you go into action, check:

• You understand the Rules of Engagement.
• Combat ID and Fire Support Co-ordination Measures (FSCM) are
in place.
• The Combat ID measures currently employed by own and allied land
forces.
• The likely location and intent of enemy units, vehicles and aircraft.
• The location and intent of close friendly units, vehicles and aircraft.
• The action to be taken if lost.
• The information you have is up-to-date.
In action, check:
• That you are where you are expected to be.
• That you have informed the chain-of-command and adjacent units if
you are not where you are expected to be.
• That any potential target is in a location and acting in a way that
makes sense.
• That you positivelty indentify a potential target as friendly, enemy,
neutral or non-combatant.
• That the ROE permit you to fire.
• That the backstop for your fire is free of friendly forces and civilians.
5-6 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
LIAISON
Responsibility for liaison is governed by the following principles. In the
event that liaison is broken, all parties attempt to re-establish liaison,
however the primary responsibility sits with the HQ or unit originally
responsible for establishing the liaison.
• Higher/Lower. LO from sub unit to higher unit.
• Left to Right. The unit on the left is the providing unit.
• Out of Contact to In Contact. The unit out of contact is the
providing unit.
• Front to Rear. The unit to the rear is the providing unit.
• Supporting/Supported. The supporting unit is the providing unit.
• Incoming/Outgoing. The incoming unit is the providing unit during
a relief.
• Military/Civilian. The military unit is the providing unit.
The LO needs to know and/or possess:

• Own HQ’s plan – especially commander’s intent and main effort key
timings, DPs and any CONPLANs, branches or sequels, marked
map, CCIRs.
• Any OSW scheduled to be released during the period of their
liaison task. LOs may deploy prior to their HQ’s O Gp and must
make arrangements to receive both orders and any amendments or
clarifications made during or after orders or during ROC drills.
• Clarity on the extent of their delegated authority to represent their
comd’s point of view, if any.
• Working knowledge of own doctrine to enable LOs to ‘read the battle’
by pre-empting likely actions of own force as situation evolves. This
is particularly important when liaising across ‘cap-badge boundaries’,
componency or multinationality.
The LO needs to provide:

• Transport plan to cover their insertion and exfiltration post-task.
• Comms to own HQ, R2 schedule and any conditions under which
they may be required to report more or less frequently, including
EMCON measures.
• The DTG or conditions for the end of their liaison task.
• CSups to maintain LOs, vehs and comms for the duration of task,
plus a buffer should the task be extended.
• Interpreters, if required.
• LOs should always assume self-sufficiency.
For further information see SOHB pg 4.1.8
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-7

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Coordination Points. Designated point at which, in all types of

combat, adjacent units/formations must make contact for purposes of
control and coordination. This may be to achieve tactical coordination,
understanding and/or mutual support between units and formations that
are working together. When setting a coordination point, the ordering
HQ must specify:
• Location of the coordination point including a grid reference and
description of the terrain feature.
• Unit/formation responsible for securing (establishing unit) and the
time by which the point must be secured / established.
• Times at which approaching teams are to RV.
• Description of each unit’s liaison team (number and type of vehicles/
personnel, call signs, radio frequencies, etc).
• Route to be used to and from the point by both liaison teams
• Recognition signals to be employed (Combat ID).
• Working language at the coordination point.
5-8 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
GUIDE TO MEDIA HANDLING

GOLDEN RULES FOR TALKING TO THE MEDIA:
• Protect Operational Information
• Don’t comment on Government Policy
• Don’t release names of casualties
• Never lie
• Don’t guess
• Don’t speculate - keep to the facts
• Don’t comment outside of your area of responsibility
• Don’t talk “off the record”
• Be positive
BEFORE THE INTERVIEW:

• Establish the purpose of the interview
• ‘WIFY’ principle - “what’s in it for you” (i.e. the Army)
• What media is it for? (i.e. live or recorded, one-to-one or discussion?)
• Get the correct clearance/chain of command authority
• Agree the first question and general lines of questioning thereafter
• Agree a background to the camera shot
• Confirm what you can discuss
• Switch off mobile phone
DURING THE INTERVIEW:

• Check your appearance - wear headdress if possible and remove
security passes from sight
• Maintain good eye contact
• Don’t sway, fidget or use notes
• Avoid one word answers
• No funnies - they may be reported out of context
• Don’t use military jargon and don’t use acronyms
• Be courteous but firm
• Jump on untruths - interrupting if necessary
• Expect un-agreed questions
• Direct your replies to the target audience
• Don’t lose your cool
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-9

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
PERSONAL PREPARATION:
• Check your appearance - wear headdress if possible and remove
security passes from sight
• Think through what you want to say
• Have a maximum of 3 points you want to make and try to make
them - irrespective of the questions
• Think of a 20sec ‘sound-bite’ which summarises what you want to
say and is most likely to be used
• Think laterally about the sort of things you may be asked about but
always bring your answer back to your key points
5-10 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
LAWS OF ARMED CONFLICT (LOAC)
You MUST:
• Comply with the law of armed conflict and with Service law.
• Comply with the Rules of Engagement (RoE) applicable to your
mission. You will be briefed on the RoE which will apply to you.
• Respect all protective emblems such as the Red Cross (and the Red
Crescent), the UN emblem and the white flag of truce.
• Treat all persons who fall into your hands humanely and protect them
from the dangers of war.
• Care for the wounded, including enemy wounded, on the basis of
medical priority.
You MUST NOT attack:

• Civilians (unless they are taking a direct part in hostilities).
• Civilian buildings or property, including cultural property, (unless they
lose their protected status and you are ordered to attack).
• Medical personnel and chaplains, hospitals, medical centres or
medical transport. These personnel and objects should be identified
by a distinctive sign, namely a red cross (or a red crescent) on a
white background. The absence of the distinctive sign does not
mean that the object or person can be attacked if you know they
belong to the protected category.
• Civil defence facilities, dykes, dams and power stations (unless they
lose their protected status and you are ordered to attack).
• Undefended towns, villages, dwellings, or buildings as well as
declared neutralized and demilitarized zones.
• Enemy combatants, as hors de combat, who abstain from any hostile
act and do not attempt to escape and either surrender, express an
intention to surrender, act under a flag of truce or are rendered
incapable of defending themselves due to wounds or sickness.
• All personnel or objects bearing protective emblems.
• Those protected by a flag of truce.
COMBAT RULES
• Use no more force than is necessary to achieve your tactical task.
• Killing or wounding the enemy by treachery is forbidden.
• It is forbidden to use poison or to alter weapons or ammunition for
the purposes of increasing injury or damage.
• A white flag of truce may be used to signal a wish to talk to the
enemy. The side using the white flag must stop fighting and indicate
a wish to communicate. Both sides must then stop fighting. Abuse
of the white flag is treachery. A flag of truce indicates no more than
an intention to enter into negotiations with the enemy. It does not
necessarily mean a wish to surrender. A flag party must not be
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-11

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
attacked. On completion of its mission it must be allowed to return

to its own lines if it wishes to do so. A flag party may be on foot or
mobile in a vehicle or aircraft flying the white flag.
• Care should be taken to avoid injury to civilians and damage to
civilian objects.
• Enemy property is not to be taken, damaged or destroyed without an
operational need. Looting is prohibited.
• It is forbidden to compel enemy nationals to take part in military
operations against their own country.
• Attacks must only be directed at military objectives. They must not
be indiscriminate in nature.
PROTECTIVE EMBLEMS
MEANING EMBLEMS
Red Cross/Red Crescent

/Red Crystal
Hospital and Safety Zones
Prisoner of War Camp

PG PW
Internment Camp
IC
Distinctive Sign of Civil
Defence
Distinctive Emblem of
Cultural Property
Works Containing
Environmentally
Dangerous Materials
e.g. Nuclear Power Plants,
Dams and Dykes, etc
Flag of Truce
5-12 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
HANDLING OF CAPTURED PERSONS

Ref: JDP 1-10, 2d ed (2011)
BASIC PRINCIPLES
All CPERS must be treated humanely at all times and are entitled to
respect for their person, honour and religion. CPERS must not be
subjected to torture, cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or violence
to life in any form.
Provide CPERS the following same level of treatment as UK forces:
• Protection - from the dangers of conflict and the environment.
• Sustainment - accommodation, water, food (3 meals a day), and
medical care.
If you cannot do so, request help from your chain of command.
Allow CPERS to:
• Rest - 8 hours of rest per 24 hour period (including one unbroken 4
hour period).
• Exercise - 1 hour per day in the open air.
• Observe their religious practices.
• Opportunity to complain about their treatment.
• Communicate with the ICRC.
If you cannot do so, request help from your chain of command.
Do not take photographs or video of CPERS unless authorised for
official purposes. This modification provides clarity to what subject
matter photographs/videos are not normally permitted without offical
authorisation.
PROHIBITED TECHNIQUES
The following five techniques must never be used as an aid to tactical
questioning or interrogation, as a form of punishment, discriminatory
conduct, intimidation, coercion or as deliberate mistreatment.
• Stress Positions. Any physical posture which a CPERS is
deliberately required to maintain will be a stress position if it becomes
painful, extremely uncomfortable or exhausting to maintain.
• Hooding. Placing a cover, including a sandbag, over a CPERS’
head and face. Hooding is prohibited at any time, for whatever
purpose.
• Subjection to Noise. Holding a CPERS in an area where there is
unnecessary excessive noise.
• Deprivation of Sleep and Rest. Depriving a CPERS of the minimum
requirement of sleep and rest.
• Deprivation of Food and Water. Depriving a CPERS of the
minimum requirement of food and water.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-13

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
SEARCH PROCEDURES
• Unless unavoidable, searches are conducted by the same
gender and female service personnel should search juveniles
or children. If this is not possible, someone senior in rank to the
searcher must supervise and record the search.
• Do not insert fingers or any other items into the mouth or body
cavity of CPERS.
• Segregate CPERS to prevent them from exchanging
information or from disposing of materiel, documents and
personal effects. Segregate CPERS according to gender, keeping
family groups together if possible. Separately segregate vulnerable
CPERS (those unable to take care of themselves due to disability,
age, or illness), and, if possible, keep them together with their carer
or family group.
• Females and children should be guarded by female service
personnel where possible. Children (under age 15) must be
guarded by a minimum of two personnel.
• Transfer CPERS away from the point of capture through the
CPERS chain as soon as possible in accordance with Theatre
specific guidance.
GUIDANCE ON CONTROL
• Search/restraint positions. Do not make CPERS maintain search
positions longer than necessary. If you must restrain a CPERS,
use minimum force to gain control of the situation for the minimum
required time. Allow them to change position regularly to prevent
pain, extreme discomfort or exhaustion.
• Restraint equipment. Only use military-issued plasticuffs to
CPERS’ hands in front of the body.
• Restriction of vision. Only restrict a CPERS vision as a last
resort to protect operational security, with military-issued blacked
out goggles. A blindfold may be improvised, but not in a manner
that causes pain, ensuring that it does not effect the airway (nose
and mouth). Do not TQ or interrogate a CPERS while their vision
is restricted. Keep a record of the time and reason for restricting a
CPERS’ vision. Hooding is prohibited at any time, for whatever
purpose.
5-14 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
INCIDENT REPORTING
Report all allegations of abuse to the service police and chain of
command immediately and preserve the scene of any incident or
physical evidence that may assist an investigation.
COMMAND AND INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITY

Adherence by Commanders
At all times, Commanders are to comply with, and require those under
their command to comply with, international and domestic law. All
alleged violations committed by UK Armed Forces are to be promptly
reported through the chain of command, thoroughly investigated and
appropriately dealt with.
Command Responsibility
Those in command are not only responsible for ensuring that they
conduct all operations in accordance with the law, but are also
responsible for the conduct of their subordinates. While a Commander
may delegate some or all of his authority, he cannot delegate
responsibility for the conduct of the force he commands.
Individual Responsibility
All members of the UK Armed Forces are to comply with domestic and
international law and, to the utmost of their ability and authority, they
are to prevent violations by others.
Following Orders
Unlawful orders are not to be given and are not to be obeyed. The
possible defence that a subordinate was ‘following orders’ will only
succeed if the subordinate did not know, and could not reasonably
have recognised, that the order was unlawful.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-15

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
TRAUMA RISK MANAGEMENT (TRiM)
The following important points on the delivery of TRiM interventions

should be noted:
• TRiM is only to be delivered by personnel who have

attended and passed an authorised TRiM course. Unit TRiM
Coordinators should ensure the competency of unit practitioners
before deployment.
• TRiM interventions should not be conducted before the 72
Hr point (TRiM is not for use in cases of battle shock).
• TRiM outcomes (Scores) must be recorded in the TRiM
incident log and are to be passed to the Unit TRiM
Coordinator for storage and subsequent action.
• Follow up risk assessments must be completed at 1 month
and at the 3 month point, even when those assessed appear
to be doing well. Outcomes (scores) must be recorded in the
incident log and should be sent to the unit TRiM Coordinator for
subsequent action.
• Where risk assessments cannot be conducted at the
specified time intervals for operational reasons, they
should still be completed even when late.
• Particular attention must be paid to item number 5 in the
risk assessment table (acute stress). The list of acute stress
factors is contained within the checklist below the main risk
assessment table.
• Sometimes troops will be involved in multiple incidents
over a protracted period of time and it may not be possible
to risk assess them after each individual incident. In these
circumstances consideration should be given to conducting risk
assessments during the rehabilitation phase of the operation.
• Every effort must be made to maintain both verbal
and written confidentiality and to adhere to the TRiM
practitioners code of conduct (issued to trained personnel).
5-16 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
When to conduct a risk assessment interview?

• Serious injury to self and others,
particularly colleagues.
In situations where,
• When personnel have been disabled the mistreatment,
or disfigured. death or injury of the
• The trauma involves death, particularly following occurs:
grotesque death.
Children, Women,
• When the trauma is complex, Elderly Disabled
long lasting or multiple. Persons and
Colleagues
• When personnel have been
involved in a ‘near miss’.
• When personnel experience
overwhelming distress after the event.
MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW
* Note:
**0 hours - Site Management Strategies
The timings are given
*0 - 24 hours - Planning Phase as a rough guide and
• Planning Meeting. must be adapted to
the individual event
• Identification of Groups and
Individuals involved in the event. One Month
• Allocating tasks and deciding upon a strategy. Follow-up and early
referral if problems
*72hrs - Assessment of Risk (BDA Model) persist
• Individual - (Group Intervention ruled out.

• Small group (>8) - (Natural Grouping or
Localised Incident).
• Briefing Meeting.
*Ongoing - Support and Monitoring
(0 – 24 hours) Filtering the event
A. Those directly involved in the event.

B. Rescuers and/or helpers
(e.g. medics, police, fire crews).
C. Those involved at a distance
(e.g. on a communications net)
D. Those who could have been
there but were not.
E. Vulnerable people
(e.g. involved in a similar incident).
F. Those who have attended the
scene out of morbid curiosity.
Assessment as a group or as
individuals
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-17

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
72 hrs – The Before, During and After (BDA) Grid
BEFORE DURING AFTER
FACTS 5WandH 1 4 7
THOUGHTS 2 5 8
FUTURE 3 6 9
Questions about:
• What, Who, Where, When, Why and How?
• Thoughts (it could have been/should have been me etc……)
Risk Assessment - Initial

When the BDA risk assessment is complete, indicate whether any of the
following risk factors were present and at what level:
Scoring -
0 = Not present 1 = Partially Present 2 = Present to a Significant Degree
DATE:
No RISK FACTOR Individual Scores

1 The person thought that they were
out of control during the event.
2 The person thought that their life

was threatened during the event.
3 The person blames others for some

aspect(s) of the event.
4 The person expresses shame about

their behaviour relating to the event.
5* The person experienced acute

stress following the event.
6 The person has experienced

substantial general stress since the
event (such as problems with work,
home and health).
7 The person is having problems with

day to day activities.
8 Talks about problems relating to

previous traumatic incidents.
9 The person has problems accessing

social support, (Family, Friends,
Unit Support).
10 The person has been drinking

alcohol excessively to cope with
their distress.
TOTALS
5-18 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
ACUTE STRESS INDICATOR CHECKLIST
Review the list and tick the boxes to indicate whether the item has
occurred at least twice in the last week
Problems Yes No
1 They had upsetting thoughts or memories about the

event that came into their mind against their will.
2 They had upsetting dreams about the event.
3 They acted or felt as if the event was happening

again.
4 They felt upset about reminders of the event.
5 They had bodily reactions (such as fast heartbeat,

stomach churning, sweatiness, dizziness) when
reminded of the event.
6 They had difficulty falling or staying asleep.
7 They experienced irritability or outbursts of anger.
8 They had difficulty concentrating.
9 They experienced heightened awareness of poten-

tial dangers to themselves or to others.
10 They were jumpy or were startled at

something unexpected.
TRiM SIGNAL REPORT
For completion upon action of full TRiM risk assessments
To: SIC TRiM REP
From: Classification: Report No
DTG: Precedence:
A 13 Description of incident (1000 Chars)
B 22 Personnel involved (3 Figs)
C 34 Service No; Rank (3000 Chars)

Initial Surname Service
Accepted (A)
Declined (D)
D 65 Risk Assessors Ser- (3000 Chars)

vice number,
Rank, Initial
Surname, Service
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-19

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Mentoring1
A Mentor is an experienced and trusted advisor who provides
counsel and leadership to another person, or organisation, by
agreement. Responsibilities: lead, influence, coach, empower,
support and train – JDN 6/11. For differences between Mentoring,
Advising, Supporting and Training (MAST) see JDN 6/11, pg 3-10.
Principles
Cultural understanding: personal, tribal, regional or caste
motivations will drive soldiers and commanders. A robust and
ruthless system of rewards may be required to support desired
behaviour. This also extends to minimising exposure to unhelpful
western influences. Understand the path that country followed to
be in its current state. Understand how HMG has influence in this
country – respect, financial etc?
Military cultural understanding: understand how the indigenous
military ethos works, what is rewarded and why. Who holds
influence. How their military fits in society. How their military
staff system works. The relative importance of ‘face’. Know what
activities they see as worthwhile.
Professional understanding: know both your doctrine and kit
and that of the indigenous force.
Define the enemy: the indigenous view may be different from
yours.
Apply local solutions: avoid measuring against UK military
standards. If it is sustainable, locally accepted and it works then
you have an enduring solution.
Select and maintain long-term achievable goals: ensure
your methods can be adopted by follow-on training teams and
eventually sustained by the indigenous force. Measure by
progress toward goals not necessarily the goals themselves.
Coordination: this may be required between the mentoring
team, the host nation security forces, other coalition forces, UK
Defence Advisor/Attaché (DA), contractors etc. The C2 chain and
stakeholders can be very complicated. It is crucial to understand
who holds what authority and who has generated the task. How
you fit into the bigger picture.
Simplicity, Flexibility, Patience
Notes
Further References: JDN 6/11 especially part 2, chapter 5; AFM Vol
1 Parts 9, 10; JDP 3-40; AKX STTT Reports; plus BAR and Combat
journal articles from AKX.
5-20 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Considerations
Command:
• Identify your C2 chain (DA, PJHQ, in-theatre unit HQ)
• Identify correct indigenous C2 chain and use it – this is not
always obvious
• TTT: enable and support the indigenous C2 at all levels
• Develop trust: reduces friction, improves security
• Recce and Training Needs Analysis are key
• Understand the indigenous Detention Pathway – legal handling
of PW
• Ensure the indigenous forces are human rights compliable
• Identify and manage STTT skill set for delivery of training
Info & Int:
• J2 threat updates from Embassy/High Commission
• Interpreters – native speakers are best.
• Consider OPSEC risks with interpreters – they may be debriefed
by the host nation
• Suitable and robust 24hr comms system
• Develop indigenous Info Ops capability
Manoeuvre:
• Qualified and experienced drivers
• Practice RTA actions
• Drive defensively
• Robust vehicle recovery procedure in country - self help, STTT
support, Embassy support.
• Maintain a low profile when transiting through airports including
internal flights.
Firepower:
• Do I need to be armed and when?
• Able to operate own and indigenous eqpts competently
• What ROE am I operating under?
• Lethal / Non lethal options.
Protection:
• Do we get indigenous security – do I need to be armed/body
armour?
• Insider threat IA drill (forcepro measures driven by PJHQ)
• Personal military skills
• Vigilance
• Have a robust Evasion Plan of Action
• Actions on Host Nation arrest
• Implement an Ops Normal procedure (daily call up C2 confirming
all is well)
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-21

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
Logistics
• Must be self reliant – med, comms, fires etc.
• Develop indigenous G1 and G4 capability – may require
separate STTT.
• Interpreter – pay, feeding, accommodation, movement
and freedom of movement.
• Finance.
Medical
• Casevac plan and internal medical capability.
• CMT 1 to be part of the ORBAT.
• HELIX / ISOS back up (commercial companies providing
med support overseas).
• Route recce to the nearest R3 medical facility – part of
RSOI.
• Have Remote Medical Support trained personnel on the
team.
• Understand indigenous forces’ capability / facilities.
• Maintain a Blood Donor Panel – list of team blood types.
• Embassy / British High Commission protocol.
Top Tips
1. Use the SAG to obtain cultural advice.
2. Never promise what you cannot deliver.
3. Manage your expectations of what standards will be
achieved.
4. Do not treat nor expect British standards from indigenous
forces.
5. Use the rank structure to deal with problems – do not
shame.
6. Empower all commanders but consider separate training to
avoid embarrassment.
7. Develop leadership as a responsibility not a privilege:
values-based leadership works.
8. High standards of personal behaviour will translate across
– set the example.
9. Focus on training the basics first.
10. Training must hold the interest of the audience and must
be done gradually.
5-22 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
COMMAND
11. Round robin training ensures everyone is taught the same

thing and is efficient.
12. Flip charts and model kits are good training aids; you may not
have access to power.
13. EDIP and competitive training work.
14. Have a Battle Rhythm but account for delays through
translation, cultural constraints, logistics.
15. Be patient and flexible.
16. More OPTAG than Pirbright – audience likely to be deploying
soon after training.
17. Adopt a “Brothers in Arms” approach.
18. Look out for changes in temperament which might indicate
wider (pay, feeding etc) problems.
Mentor Personal qualities

• Self confidence and motivation to act in the absence of
frequent and explicit instruction.
• Humility to accept another culture and customs as the norm.
• Patience and perseverance to accept small gains while
accepting frequent setbacks.
• Humour.
• Social skills to build robust working relationships.
• Improvisation skills to make up for a lack of specialists (signals,
logistics etc).
• Professional competence.
• Awareness of wider political/strategic/operational/cultural
situation and their place within it.
• Able to target their level of understanding/ability without being
patronising. Inject humour, enthusiasm and be humble and
authoritative in equal measure.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-23

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
UNDERSTANDING & INFORMATION ACTIVITY
INT BRIEFS AND DEBRIEFS

Some patrols may be specifically tasked with intelligence tasks. Others,
especially in a COIN environment, may not have a specific or implied
intelligence tasks. As applicable all patrols are to be debriefed to extract
any potential information of intelligence value.
PATROL INTELLIGENCE DEBRIEF CHECKLIST

Ser Heading Comments
01 SIGACTS and Occurrences during the patrol.
02 Answers to key IRs/Intelligence Tasks.
03 Route taken and status of routes.
04 Observations of local populace/atmospherics.
05 Details of any encounters If further information is
with adversary forces. available beyond SIGACTs
in 01; e.g. personalities/
networks.
06 Key personalities/ CASCONs met.
07 Any changes to the human terrain noted (e.g. based on
ASCOPE).
08 Changes to the terrain or physical environment.
09 Comments on host
nation security forces if
encountered/ a partnered
patrol.
5-24 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

PATROL REPORT
UK R3 MESSAGE TITLE - TITLE - NAME OF MSG OWNER/SPONSOR UK MESSAGE REF NO
UK PATROL REPORT UKPTLREP HQ Inf
Cap Branch
SO2 Sldr Systems NATO MSG REF NO
Mil Tel: 2635

To: SIC:
From: Classification (When Complete)
As At/DTG: Precedence:
A Patrol designation
Parent unit/sub-unit ID (20 Chars)
Callsign or nickname (10 Chars)
Patrol serial number (10 Chars)
B Patrol size (2 Figs)
C Composition of patrol (200 Chars)

D Task/Mission (200 Chars)
E Departure DTG (12 Chars)

F Return DTG (12 Chars)
5-25
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PATROL REPORT
5-26
G Routes out and in / Area of Operations (300 Chars)
H Terrain (100 Chars)
I Enemy/Opposing forces (OPFOR):

Location GR (10 Chars)
Time activity observed (12 Chars)
Strength (10 Chars)
Activity/attitude (100 Chars)
Weapons and equipment (100 Chars)
Disposition (100 Chars)
Intention (100 Chars)
Additional observations (100 Chars)
Command Post(s) identified (100 Chars)
J Map corrections (400 Chars)
K Miscellaneous Information (including NBC, water points, (400 Chars)

helicopter landing strips (HLS), airstrips, evidence of criminality
e.g. rape)
L Results of encounters with the enemy/OPFOR/civilian population (400 Chars)

M Condition of patrol:
Fit for further tasking (2 Figs)
Wounded (2 Figs)
Killed in action (KIA) (2 Figs)

Missing (2 Figs)

Captured (2 Figs)
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PATROL REPORT
N Conclusions and recommendations (500 Chars)
O Identification (ID) of de-briefer (30 Chars)

P Additional remarks by interrogator (100 Chars)
Q Commander's assessment (500 Chars)
Include dropping off points (DOPs) and pick up points (PUPs).

5-27
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Walk-Ins.
• Hold the individual at the gate and alert the J2 cell.
• If walk-in is female, use a service-woman for liaison (where possible)
• Debrief those persons who have had contact with the walk-in.
• Ensure that the Guard Force is aware of the individual’s presence.
• Keep the individual out of sight of other LECs/LNs in order to limit
exposure.
• Ensure that the appropriate searches have been made and that ID
has been checked.
• Establish how long the individual has available.
• Ask what the individual has told other people he/she is doing.
Casual Contacts (CASCONs). Any person who voluntarily discloses
information or opinion to members of the UK Armed Forces during
an overt, casual or chance meeting is referred to as a CASCON.
Tasking and payment is not permitted. C1 forms are to be filled in after
every CASCON meeting. Include A-H and if possible a photo. When
applicable also include associated veh details.
Debriefing. There are eight key questions that should always be
considered during any debrief and failure to address these will likely
result in an incomplete picture:
• Who?
• Where?
• When?
• What?
• Why?
• How?
• In what strength?
• Who else knows?
General. Units are to notify J2X if any CASCON is:
• Passing information gained from another person.
• Reporting overheard conversations.
• Suspected of being compromised.
• Is doing anything that could endanger friendly forces or themselves.
• Believed to be a minor, mentally unstable or a drug user.
Security considerations. It should also be noted that:
• CASCONs may approach several locations using false / different
names.
• The enemy may use CASCONs in an attempt to illicit information.
• CASCONs have previously tried to set up security forces.
5-28 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION OF AN INDIVIDUAL (A-H)

A AGE (Attempt to bracket the age by two years e.g. 26 to 28).
B BUILD
(Tall/fat/small/stocky/skinny. Avoid medium/average etc.).
C CLOTHING (Start at head and work down. Colours, brand

names, buttons and zips should be included).
D DISTINGUISHING FEATURES (Facial scars, tattoos,

burns and moustaches etc.).
E ELEVATION (How tall are they? As an aid the average door

height is 6’6”).
F FACE (Long, oval, thin, high cheekbones, spots, complexion,

wrinkles), ears (big/small/cauliflower/earrings).
G GAIT (How do they walk? Long stride, small paces, pigeon

toed, flatfooted, swagger, slouch or limp).
H HAIR (Describe the colour and thickness, is the person going

bald? Long/short hair, receding hairline. Parting or obvious
style, sideburns?).
S SEX (Male or female).
SCRIM - DESCRIPTION OF VEHICLES

S SHAPE Saloon/coupe/van etc.
C COLOUR
R REGISTRATION If fitted with plates.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES
I
Spoilers/coloured trim/unusual antennas/ specific damage.
M MAKE/MODEL. Toyota/Mercedes etc.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-29

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
WORKING WITH INTERPRETERS - TOP TIPS

• Keep the topic simple.
• Speak slowly and articulate words.
• Speak directly to the other person - not the interpreter.
• Do not allow the interpreter to strike up a personal conversation
with the other person.
• Position the interpreter to your side, NEVER between you and the
other person.
• NEVER use phrases such as “tell him” or “ask him”.
• Avoid using slang or colloquialisms.
• Know the classification of your interpreter (LEC, etc).
5-30 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MATERIAL AND PERSONNEL EXPLOITATION (MPE)

The Importance of MPE. Level 1 MPE, otherwise known as Op
SCREEN, is the collection and non-intrusive examination of materiel
and Tactical Questioning (TQ) of personnel conducted forward of a
dedicated facility. It is intended to maximise the intelligence value of
detained individuals.
Materiel Collection.
• Site Exploitation should be conducted in line with the STRES
concept as follows:
• Search thoroughly and gather all exploitable materiel.
• Tag correctly. Include date/loc of capture and any special
circumstances of capture.
• Report actionable intelligence immediately to the Tactical Comd.
• Evacuate captured documents and materiel rapidly.
• Safeguard captured documents and materiel - protect them in
their original condition.
• Prioritisation of captured materiel is as follows: Digital Devices,
Communications Equipment, Possible IED making equipment,
Identification Documents.
PRESERVATION OF FORENSIC EVIDENCE

• No smoking or eating whilst dealing with any potential evidence.
• Always wear gloves when handling the items before they are sealed
in bags.
• Handle the items as little as possible.
• Photograph the items in the position they are found and take a close
up photograph of the item itself.
• Fill in the details asked for on the front of the evidence bag.
• Never leave a bag open when an item has placed inside, always
seal it at the time.
• Use separate bags for separate items of evidence or individuals’
effects.
• (If poss) Photograph the items in the position they are found with
the detainee.
• (If poss) Photograph all the items gathered up with the detainee.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-31

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIREPOWER
FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION MEASURES (FSCM)
Fire support coordination is used to integrate land, air, and maritime

fires while ensuring the safety of friendly forces. All boundaries are
by default Restrictive Fire Lines (RFLs). The main FSCMs are:
• Airspace Coordination Area (ACA). A restricted area or route

of travel for use by friendly aircraft established for the purpose
of preventing friendly aircraft from fratricide by surface to surface
fires.
• Fire Support Coordination Line (FSCL). No fire or weapon
effects short of the line. Attacks short of the FSCL must be
coordinated with the appropriate ground force commander.
• Coordinated Fire Line (CFL) (Formerly known as the Fire
Support Safety Line). The is a line beyond which, indirect, fire
support may fire at any time within boundaries without additional
co-ordination.
• Free Fire Area (FFA). A designated area into which any weapon
system may fire without co-ordination.
• No Fire Area (NFA). An area into which no fires are allowed
except:
• When the establishing headquarters approves fires (tempo-
rarily) within the NFA on a mission by mission basis.
• When an enemy force within the NFA engages a friendly
force, the commander may engage the enemy to defend his
force.
• Restricted Fire Area (RFA). An area where specific restrictions

are imposed and in which fires that exceed those restrictions
are not allowed without co-ordination with the establishing
headquarters.
• Restrictive Fire Line (RFL). A line established between friendly
forces (one or both may be moving) that prohibits all fire or
effects from fires across the line without coordination with the
affected unit.
• Restricted Operations Zone (ROZ). Airspace of defined
dimensions, designated by the airspace control authority in
response to specific situations and/or requirements, within which
the operation of one or more airspace users is restricted.
Further BM descriptions can be found in SOHB page 3.14_4
5-32 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIREPOWER
METHODS OF INDICATION
METHOD DAY NVS (FLIR) NVG

(II)
Coded Laser Target Y Y Y
Designator/Marker
Smoke Y N N
Tracer Y Limited Using Y

Naked Eye
M203 Illumination Y Y Y
Round
Comd’s Laser N N Y
Pointer/Non coded
Laser Target Marker
Day-Glo Panel Y N N
Smoke Y N N
Signalling Mirror Y N N
Body Position Y Y N
(Jesus/Elvis etc)
Thermal Panels Limited Limited Limited
Red or IR N N Y
Cylume on String
(Buzzsaw)
Laser Roping with N N Y

Comd’s Pointer
White Strobe Y N Y
IR Strobe N N Y
Thermal marker panels would need to be approx 1m x 1m

at 500m to be readily identifiable without employment of the
aircraft sights (which are required for weapon aiming).
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-33

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIREPOWER
Dismounted Section BREAK Contact Drills
Drills including video are available in chapter 6 to DCC Training Vol

1 - Skill at Arms - Individual Training. A swift, well-rehearsed and violent
reaction is key to success during the break contact drill.
Section in unrestricted ground: Contact Front. The point soldier
returns automatic fire and, simultaneously, shouts ‘contact front’. The
second soldier takes a single pace to his left, the third soldier a single
pace to his right and the fourth soldier 2 paces to his right: all return fire
as soon as they have clear line of sight. This enables the lead Fire team
to all engage the enemy.
The rear Fire team, under the 2ic’s direction should move left or right
into a position to lay down suppressive fire (Fig 1). This action regains
the initiative through a swift and aggressive reaction. The extraction
process then follows.
Fig 1. Regain the initiative
Enemy
The point man then turns and runs back until he is level with the second
soldier. They then move back as a pair whilst soldiers 3 and 4 provide
fire support (along with Delta Fire team). They run back as far as in line
with Soldier 4. This may leave Soldier 3 forward of a Fire team baseline
so he will move back next. The Fire team is now complete in a baseline
(Fig 2). “Baseline” is shouted by the commander.
5-34 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIREPOWER
Fig 2. Extract - Pairs F & M
Baseline
Fire team F&M can now commence (Fig 3) until contact is broken
and a safe rally point is identified in dead ground to the enemy. The
section then peels off or moves directly into the rally point. This must
be done silently. The commander will then check for casualties and
that all members of the patrol are present, send a contact report,
ensure that ammunition is redistributed if necessary and give quick
battle orders before moving off.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-35

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
FIREPOWER
Fig 3. Extract - Sect F & M
Sect F & M continues until

rally point is identified. Sect
then peels off or moves
directly to rally point.
Contact Rear. Everyone turns around. The drill is then the same as
for Contact Front except for the patrol continuing to move in its original
direction of advance.
Contact Flank. If the contact comes from the side, it is particularly
important that any member of the patrol who identifies where the
enemy is firing from shouts ‘contact left’ (or ‘right’ as appropriate) the
patrol simply turns to the left and returns fire. The patrol can then
withdraw using Fire team F&M until contact is broken and a safe rally
point reached.
Section in restricted ground: Contact Front. The point soldiers
(or soldier if in single file) immediately return fire. The rest of the
patrol kneel and take aim towards the enemy. The point soldiers then
turn inward and run down the centre of the track whilst the next pair
continues to provide fire support. The pair then move beyond the end
of the section and go to ground. This ‘peeling back’ continues rapidly
until contact is broken.
Contact Flank. If the contact comes from a side, everyone turns
to face the enemy and opens fire. The patrol then starts peeling off
from the point man. If the patrol is in single file, this can be done
immediately. If in file, those on the ‘far’side of the track need to move
forward into a baseline in order to allow those running back to pass
safely behind them whilst they lay down suppressive fire.
5-36 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
HELICOPTER DRILLS
HLS LAYOUT AND DIMENSIONS

• A HLS will normally be established by specially trained personnel;
this aide memoire is for operational and emergency use by others.
• Unit HHIs are to set up HLS to NATO size 5 (Chinook) dimensions.
This may be reduced with advice from aircrew or MAOT.
• If no liaison is possible with the helicopter unit and the aircraft type is
therefore not known, the Chinook dimensions are to be used.
• Key to type of surface and zone diameters:
A) Hard Surface
B) Free of Obstruction
over 0.3 metre
C) Free of Obstruction
over 0.6 metre
HELICOPTER A B C
BRH (NATO size 1) 6m 14m 25m
Chinook / Puma / Sea 15m 60m 100m
King / Merlin (NATO
size 5)
A - Hard Surface Zone B - Clear to Ground Level Zone

C - Zone Free of Obstacles over 0.6m
Approach/Exit Paths:
1. Obstruction free
2. Into the wind
3. Minimum 50m wide.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-37

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
6º at night only if Glideslope Indicator used
6º is approx the height of an SA80 Rifle at 8m
Notes:
A. Obstruction angle is measured from the outside of the “Cleared to
Ground Level” zone
B. By day the obstruction height cannot exceed an approach angle of
6° out to 500m from the landing point
C. By night the obstruction height cannot exceed an approach angle
of 4° out to 500m
Marking an HLS:
BY DAY: (one or more)

• Fluorescent Panels
• Marshal (back to wind and arms raised)
• Coloured Smoke
• Letter H
• Flash cards/mirrors/ firefly/ IR Strobe
BY NIGHT: (one or more)

• Firefly or Cylumes
• NATO ‘T’
Notes:
Use White or green lights, avoid blue. Use red to mark obstructions.
Standard NATO Helicopter Drills:

• Remove headress, roll down sleeves, wear eye protection
• Switch off ECM and remove antennas
• Wait to be told by load-master to approach
• Mount/Dismount at correct angles
• NEVER walk around rear tail blade
• NEVER shine white light at the pilot at night
5-38 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DESERT BOX HLS

The Desert Box HLS is not universally endorsed and some NATO
countries may not be familiar with the layout. It is incumbent on units
to check with the JHF HQ that the layout below is currently in use.
Wind Direction Min 50m -

Max 100m
to next Box
IR/Red IR/Red
10m
Cyalume Firefly
USL PUP
15m 15m
Troops
(Furthest right box only)
10m
30m
10m Clear
Notes:
1. Area within Cyalume box to be
clear for landing.
2. IR Firefly to be turned off when
aircraft on approach.
USL DOP 3. Smoke can be used to indicate
wind direction.
4. Troops located between 3-5
o’clock (side door or rear ramp
Aircraft Approach loading) of furthest right box.
5. During daylight, secured hi-vis
Direction markers are to be used at corners.
6. Aircraft approach to be made to
nearest (rear) 2 light of the box.
7. Slope should be less than+/- 5
degrees within box and clear area,
but 0 downslope.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-39

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
HELICOPTER LOADS and ANGLES
HELICOPTER PAX MOUNT/DISMOUNT

ANGLES
BRH (Lynx, Wildcat) 3 10 and 2 O’Clock
Puma 10 10 and 2 O’Clock
Blackhawk 11 10 and 2 O’Clock
Sea King 20 10 and 2 O’Clock
Merlin 24 3 and 5 O’Clock
Stallion 57 3 and 5 O’Clock
Chinook 54 6 O’Clock
Battlefield Helicopter Considerations
• Minimum Force required on the ground. (Consider Bump and/or

Abort plan).
• Landing Site(s) (LS) selection. (Primary/secondary/tertiary).
• LS security.
• LS organisation. (MAOT/HHI availability?).
• Aircraft familiarisation and boarding procedures.
• Stick organisation (inc ldrs).
• Equipment Order (Fighting, Patrol, Marching) and average tp wts.
• Additional Equipment requirements.
• Resupply requirements (for extended ops).
• ISTAR availability.
• Ground/Air Comms.
5-40 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
NATO ‘T’
The minimum criteria for a non-specialist to lay a NATO ‘T’ is:
• Site reconnaissance to be carried out by a Helicopter Handling

Instructor (HHI).
• The minimum LP to be Size 5 (100m diameter).
• The obstruction angle to be a maximum of 2 degrees estimated, or
4 degrees measured, in the approach; and departure sector of 16
degrees azimuth out to 3000m, as measured from the outer edge of
the cleared to ground level.
• The approach path is to be 100m wide, but may be reduced to 50m
wide with the authority of the helicopter unit.
• The ground should be as flat as possible, but a 3 degree (1 in 20)
maximum forward and lateral slope is permitted; no reverse slope
is permitted.
• NATO ‘T’ with a maximum of 2 load points or TDPs.
• It is most important that troops/casualties are positioned so that
they do not obstruct the approach or departure path or the LP. They
should assemble 20m from the edge of a hard surface, in the 3
o’clock position.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-41

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
NATO ‘T’
5-42 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
Aviation Operations
Loading
Key Loading Considerations:
• The Loading Plan is based on the ground tactical
commander’s initial and secondary objectives. Troops
are loaded in the order required to deplane and meet those
objectives.
• Task Org. As each serial lands, the force must be ready to
fight. The TASKORG must be organised on the pick up HLS
not the drop-off HLS.
• Key Personnel & Eqpt. These must be split across aircraft
in case of loss. Examples: Comds and 2ICs; MFC A&B;
CMTs; support weapons etc. They should be suitably marked
to aid identification.
• High Value Items. Avoid placing high value items in under-
slung loads. They may be jettisoned if the a/c comes under
contact or difficulty.
• Bump plans must be developed to permit the rapid
reordering of loads following the loss of an a/c from a
particular wave or when an a/c cannot accept its allocated
load.
Internal AND UNDERSLUNG LOADS
CH-47/Merlin: Internal Loads are positioned 60 meters to the

6 o’clock position of the Touch Down Point (where the aircraft
lands). Emplaning Troops are positioned to the 6 o’clock
position of Internal Loads.
Puma/Lynx: Internal Loads are positioned 60 meters to the
9 o’clock of the Touch Down Point. Emplaning Troops are
positioned to the 6 o’clock position of Internal Loads.
Under Slung Loads: Under Slung Loads (USL) are positioned
in the 12 o’clock position 100 meters from the Touch Down
Point. Subsequent loads are staggered 25 meters forward in
line. The port load is lifted first, then the starboard load.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-43

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
Helicopter Deplaning techniques
Ref: 16X Battlebook v5 & US FM 3-99, 2014.

There are five techniques to deplane the Aircraft. The deplaning
techniques can be split between chalks or serials. Considerations: troop
experience, simplicity/complications with C2, positions of other aircraft
on the gound, restricting door gunner arcs, speed of clearing HLS
vulnerability to IDF or direct fire. Choice of deplaning techniques must
be discussed with the pilots during the planning process and before
boarding.
• One-Side Prone. All personnel deplane from one door on the aircraft
and rally in one location 5 meters from the aircraft. They remain in
the position until the aircraft departs the HLS.
• One-Sided Rush. All personnel exit from one open door and rush
to rally in cover.
• Two - Sided Prone. Chalk personnel are split into two C2 groupings
during the loading phase. On landing the two groupings exit to
separate Rally points at 3 and 9 o’clock of the aircraft and adopt the
prone position.
• Two sided Rush. As per the two sided prone, but personnel then
clear the HLS using the 3 and 9 o’clock headings as their axis.
• Ramp Exit. Personnel exit the aircraft and form 180O defence until
the aircraft departs the HLS. The unit then executes a one- or two-
sided rush as per orders.
Ramp Exit
PL HQ
SE
CT CT
SE
SECT
UNIT MAY EXIT THE LS EITHER RIGHT

OR LEFT IAW THE LANDING PLAN
5-44 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
Chalk Landing Techniques

One Side Prone Two Sided Prone
One Side Rush One Sided Rush

Cover
Serial Landing Techniques - Two Sided Rush

Two Sided Rush Two Sided Rush
USL Landing. OC Heavy Drop will assume command of the

USL area; non-specialist BGs should seek the advice of the
MAOT. The Coy should be hold a HHI & LPC to run the HLS.
USL Layout. The USL layout should mimic the staging HLS
layout as much as possible. For example if the pick-up HLS has
troops followed by USLs then the drop-off HLS should try and
have troops followed by USL on its landing axis.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-45

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
AVIATION OPERATIONS GO / NO-GO CRITERIA

Operation:
Condition Status Comment
WEATHER
ILLUM
ISTAR
• IN PLACE
• EF ACTIVITY
MANOEUVRE
• LIFT A/C
• ATTACK A/C
• UNITS IN HLS POSTURE
• LANDING FMN
• DEPLANING METHOD
• RESERVE
FIRES
• AIR
• SEAD
• IDF
• PRE-ASSAULT FIREPLAN
PROTECTION
• COMBAT ID
• ROUTES DECONFLICTED
• ROZ SET
CSS
• CASEVAC
•
•
FARP
DOOR BUNDLES

• USL
• AIRCRAFT FAILURE PLAN
C2
• BUMP PLAN

CIS

NO GO criteria met
All GO criteria met for Comd for specific aspect.
specific aspect call Suggested DELAY,
DIVERT or ABORT.
5-46 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
Aviation Operations
Use of IR illum to support Black Light

operations
1. Mor illum fired from HLS. Firing of illum must be coordinated with
the aircraft pilot.
2. Mor illum fired offset to HLS. Firing of illum must be coordinated with
the aircraft pilot.
3. Hand-held illum (example used for Desert Box HLS). Illum

firing timings must be given by the pilot of the approaching
aircraft.
Wind Direction
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-47

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
READY TO MOVE. Move hand as DEPLOY. Arm extended below

if cranking car handle. shoulder level and waved slowly
from side to side, hand open. If de-
ployment to either flank is wanted,
the commander points to the flank
concerned, after completing thes-
ignal.
ADVANCE OR FOLLOW ME. HALT/REST. Arm raised until the

Arm swung from rear to front be- hand is level with the shoulder.
low the shoulder. Indicate length of halt by fingers.
Point to rest area.
GO BACK OR TURN ROUND. CLOSE OR JOIN ME. Hand

Hand circled at hip height. placed circled at hip height. on top
of head, elbow square to the right
or left, according to which hand is
used. Point to RV.
5-48 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
DOUBLE. Clenched hand moved SLOW DOWN (APC). Arm extend-

up and down between thigh and ed to the side below the shoulder,
shoulder.. palm downwards, moved slowly
up and down, wrist loose.
LIE DOWN OR DISMOUNT AS YOU WERE, OR SWITCH

(APC). Two or three slight move- OFF (APC). Forearm extended
ments with the open hand towards downwards, hand open, waved
the ground (palm downwards). across the body parallel to the
ground.
ENEMY SEEN OR SUSPECTED. NO ENEMY IN SIGHT OR ALL

Thumb pointed towards the CLEAR. Thumb pointed upwards
ground from a clenched fist. from a clenched fist.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-49

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
LSW GUNNER (GUN GROUP). SCOUT GROUP. Clenched fist

Clenched fist raised to shoulder with forefinger upright.
height.
GUN GROUP. ‘Victory’ sign - first LIGHT MORTAR. Weapons

and second fingers extended held vertical.Imitate loading of
and open in V, remainder of fist rounds.
closed.
UGL. Weapon brought to aim.

Tap bottom of hand grip. NLAW. Weapon placed on
shoulder and held like a LAW.
5-50 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
SECTION COMMANDER. Two PLATOON COMMANDER. Two

opened fingers held against arm opened fingers held on shoulder to
to indicate Corporal’s stripes. indicate a Lieutenant’s stars.
GIVE COVERING FIRE. Weapon OBSTACLES OR CROSSING OR

brought into aim. TRACK JUNCTION. Arms
crossed. For water obstacle make
waves.
HOUSE OR HUT. Hands folded RECONNAISSANCE. Hand held

in inverted V to indicate shape to eye,as though using monocular.
of roof.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-51

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
ATTACK. A chopping movement MOVE UP. Fingers spread, arm

with edge of hand in direction at- swung slowly in direction move-
tack is required. ment is required.
FORM AMBUSH. Hand placed FREEZE AND LISTEN. Hand

over face, followed by pointing to cupped to ear.
place of ambush.
O GROUP. Fingers together, RIGHT/LEFT FLANKING. A

moved in conjunction with thumb curved sweeping movement
to indicate person talking. of the arm in the direction con-
cerned.
5-52 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC HAND SIGNALS
FIRE AND MOVEMENT. One SPACE OUT. Palm of hands held

hand used in a rolling forward ac- against weapon and moved away
tion in front of the body. several times.
SINGLE FILE. One arm fully ex- STAGGERED FILE. Both arms
tended above the head. fully extended above the head.
ARROWHEAD. Both arms forced EXTENDED LINE. Arms raised

backwards or forwards at an an- to the side level with the ground,
gle of 800 mils, depending on indicate which side gun group is
whether arrow is to the back or to go.
forward.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-53

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
AFV LIGHT/HAND SIGNALS

DAY
Think Health and Safety - always check it is safe to reverse

Are you trained to supervise?
5-54 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
AFV LIGHT/HAND SIGNALS

NIGHT
Note:
The driver must stop the vehicle when the light source is not
visible.
The type of turn, conventional or neutral, must be co-ordinated

between the guide and driver prior to marshalling.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-55

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
TACTICAL HAND SIGNALS (MOUNTED)
5-56 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
TACTICAL HAND SIGNALS (MOUNTED)
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-57

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
BASIC CONVOY DISCIPLINE DRILLS

Veh Comd: You are responsible for your vehicle, the driver and
any load and all occupants. Ensure that you maintain good convoy
discipline at all times.
• Be alert to Combat Indicators.

(Absence of the Normal and Presence of the Abnormal)
• Order Top Cover up and down in response to the threat and
the terrain.
• Drive in the centre of the road to maximise your distance from
roadside devices.
• Use of appropriate speed. Keep your speed down. You will not
outrun an IED.
• Give yourself time to move to your destination tactically. If you
are late, speak to the Ops Room. Better late than never.
• Know and understand all theatre-specific TTPs.
• Know your route.
• Maintain good communications.
• Be alert to the threat.
• Maintain an offensive mindset. Do not be afraid to take action
against any enemy forces.
• Use your Seat Belt - it will save your life.
• Ensure all kit is securely stowed - don’t let it become a
secondary hazard if you have an accident or suffer an IED
strike.
• Actions on breakdown/accident.
• Check security of any load.
5-58 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
ROAD MOVE CHECKLIST

• Organisation of columns and composition of tactical groups.
• Vehicle loads, including personnel.
• Normal speeds and densities by day and by night.
• Normal halts.
• Marking of heads and tails of organised elements of columns
by day and by night.
• Protection on the move and at halts including camouflage
of vehicles.
• Procedure at stoppages and halts.
• Action in the event of attack from the ground or the air.
• Methods of marking routes by day and by night.
• Vehicle markings and lighting.
• Duties of vehicle commanders and orders for drivers.
• Responsibility for issue of operation orders for movement of
headquarters.
• Composition and duties of advance and harbour parties.
• Drill for establishing headquarters on arrival.
• Embussing, debussing and deployment procedures.
• Inspection of vacated sites for security purposes.
• Normal administrative arrangements (e.g. rations, F and
L, medical, repair, recovery and towing, allotment of RMP
resources, transport operating record, accident reports).
• Signposting and traffic control.
• Responsibility for manning start and release points, sector
controls and traffic posts.
• Duties of unit personnel trained in traffic control, including
officers in charge of traffic posts.
• Communications for traffic control purposes.
• Instructions for crossing military bridges or ferries.
• Detour drills.
• Harbour drills.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-59

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
HIDE DRILLS
Sequence of Events:
• Recce.
• Warning Order.
• Tactical move to RV via replen.
• Guide vehicles from RV into hide position.
• Five minutes stand to.
• Post sentries (Ground, Air, NBC).
• Commanders give vehicle states to Tp Ldr.
• Hide SOPs, incl track discipline.
• Tp Ldr visits all locations.
• Confirmatory Orders.
• Hide routine.
Considerations
C - Concealment from ground and air.

A - All-round defence.
D - Dispersion.
E - Easy access and breakout.
L - Location in relation to battle positions.
5-60 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
DCC Fight Light
Ref: DN 14/07 on BAeBB for further information.
THREE SUPPORTING PILLARS OF FIGHT LIGHT

Agile CSS. Agile CSS systems and groupings at all levels are required
to build confidence in a robust G4 chain and develop the necessary
‘just in time’ aggressive approach to resupply that lies at the heart of a
successful fight light organisation.
Effective Planning. Underpinned by a thorough and realistic
understanding of the duration and likely demand of the task within
the tactical context. Effective planning will consider the requirements
and frequency of resupply to maintain ‘little and often’ topping up
of CSUPs to minimising the total load carried. Every wheeled or
tracked movement within the battlespace should be considered as an
opportunity to conduct resupply.
Mission-Specific Equipment Carriage. Commanders at all levels
must tailor the equipment carried to the specific tactical task as well as
climate, terrain and the relative fatigue state of their troops. Additional
equipment should be carried on G4 vehicles as close to the F-echelon
as possible as the tactical task, terrain, time of day or threat changes.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-61

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
PRINCIPLES OF FIGHT LIGHT

When the supporting pillars are in place, commanders must
consider the principles of ‘fight light’, listed below, to maximise
the chances of mission success:
Focus on the Mission. Consideration of what balance of
lethality, mobility and protection is required to achieve the
mission. Having identified the appropriate equipment required
to achieve all specified and implied tasks, the commander must
be ruthless in determining what will be worn, carried, secured
or back-loaded.
Manage the Risk. Commanders must understand the likely
threats to be faced within the mission (enemy, physical terrain,
climate, fatigue etc). Any resulting risks must then be assessed
and mitigated either through changes to tactics, increasing
resources (eg medical support) or increasing protection (eg
PPE level, STA overwatch). Carrying more equipment or
ammunition should not be the automatic solution.
Exploit Opportunities. Commanders should seek all
opportunities to reduce the load on the soldier. These could
be exploiting tactical advantage to adapt the PPE level worn
or carried, exploitation of transport, or use of water or power
scavenging capabilities. The fight light principles may provide
significant opportunities in a tactical situation, for example small,
lightly loaded groups may be able to infiltrate rapidly through
complex terrain to outflank or encircle an enemy position
removing the need to conduct a deliberate assault against a
well defended position.
Resource the Resupply Chain. Reliable resupply is
fundamental to reducing the soldier’s load. Commanders must
consider what assets are available to transport and secure
mission resources (eg aviation, vehicles, pack animals, people).
The commander must then decide where the materiel will be
positioned in the echelon system to ensure rapid resupply whilst
minimising exposure to fire.
Enforce the Approach. Commanders at all levels must ensure
the fight light principles are considered and clearly articulated
in orders and rehearsals. Adherence must be enforced by
the chain of command through inspections before and during
execution of tasks. It is the responsibility of all commanders
to enforce compliance through personal example, regular
inspections and maintenance of high standards of discipline
across the force.
5-62 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
MANOEUVRE
Marking of an FUP
The figure below indicates the layout for a generic dismounted
company FUP. Platoon FUPs are simply scaled down. Lights
are shown to indicate night marking options. Details on how to
recce and mark an FUP are given in Appendix 1 to Annex A of
Chapter 1 of DCC Vol 1, The Company Group; Company Group
Tactics, pages 1A-1 to 1A-2. The recce, marking and security
task are usually given to the reserve Platoon.
Obj
LD
Pl HQ Pl HQ
Coy HQ
Reserve Pl
KEY: Marker for beginning of FUP

Protection Patrols
Coloured Lights Coy Checkpoint
Tape or Cable Dimensions vary according to ground
Note:
Occupation will normally be from the base of the ‘T’. Depending on the ground,
occupation can be from any point of the ‘T’ in which case sub-unit order of march in
the occupation will vary, and need to be carefully considered.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-63

5-64
Note 1 Note 2
A C
CLASS 70 CLASS 70
B OBSTACLE
TRACKED TRACKED
30 degrees
0 CL
S3 E WH ASS
AS ED EE 30
CL EEL Class 30 should ideally take vehicles from nearest hard LE
WH standing or good going back on to similar surface. D
Ref: Military Engineering Vol II Pam 7
Note 1:
MANOEUVRE
DEFILE MARKING
A (Width of defile funnel) - dictated by ground Two red and white lane markers and two green or white
B (Length of defile funnel) - min 50m lights/cyalumes or beta lights secured to first and last 1.8m
C (Defile/lane width) - min 4.5m (both tracked and wheeled) pickets at either side of obstacle.
D (1.8m picket spacing) - min 5m, max 15m
E (Wheeled vehicles line-up box) - min 10m Note 2:
One red and white lane marker and one green or white
Maximum marking Minimum marking Minimum marking only used for light/cyalume secured to every second picket along length
F-echelon packets and must be of defile.
upgraded to maximum as soon
as practicable. Red lights/cyalumes not to be used within any defile.
Ref: ME Vol II Pam 7.

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
ROUTINE
The Should know:
Soldier Tp/pl commander’s intent Tp/pl
mission
Enemy - Intent, likely tactics Sect’s
tasks and location Neighbouring
positions
Location of Tp/Pl HQ
Movement Obstacle/tripflare/
Claymore locations
(comd initiated only)
Orders for opening fire/raising alarm
Weapon arcs
CBRN threat level/Dress State
Can explain ground from range card
Password
RoE
Should be fed, alert, rested and clean
Morale/creature comforts
Defensive Manning
positions/ Camouflage
Trenches State of repair
Arc markers for night use
Range cards properly made out and
to hand
Equipment properly stowed
Radios protected
Personal Clean, oiled for local conditions

Weapons On stands
Loaded and sights set correctly
CWS
Gas regulator correctly fitted
Ammo to hand
Grenades correctly stored
Personal Properly stowed/serviceable/clean

Equipment To hand
Secure
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-65

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
ROUTINE
Comms Comms mechanisms.
Signals understood.
Track plan/movement corridors.
Correct CSCM state.
Radios on frequency.
Orders for breaking/lifting radio silence.
Spare charged batteries available.
Sentries See Sentry Orders (page 2-38)
GMG / HMG / MMG Laid on FPF.

Range cards properly made out and
to hand.
Targets registered and reading checked.
Orders for opening fire known.
Priority of targets.
Primary and secondary arcs.
Map Predicted Fire (MPF).
Javelin Orders for opening fire known.

Engagement priorities.
Battle card.
Method of fire control.
Lead vehicle method.
Key point method.
Lt mor Range card.

Priority of targets.
Obscuration free zones.
Orders for opening fire.
Cleanliness.
Storage of bombs.
LAW State of weapon system.

Orders for opening fire.
Claymores Location.
Orders for initiating (comd initiated only).
Trip flares Location.

Initiation method/orders.
CSCM.
Actions on initiation.
Walk ins Securing (safe area to talk).

Information gathering - legal.
Munitions deposit (safe area to store).
5-66 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
PATROL HARBOURS
Sequence Selection.
Recce.
Clearance ptls.
Sentries.
Work routine.
Selection Mission.
Map/air photos/ptlreps.
Air/ground recce.
Distance from habitation.
Access to water.
Easily defended.
Max cover from ground and air.
Routes in and out.
Good comms.
Access to HLS.
Occupation Break track if nec.

Snap ambush.
Recce.
Loc of 6 and 12 o’clock.
Test comms.
Lay perimeter wire.
Sects occupy.
Adopt fire positions/cover arcs of fire.
Tp/pl comd checks position.
Clearance Ptl per sect deploy to cover arc.

Ptls out through neighbouring LMG/LSW, in
through own.
Limit of vis and sound.
Report to tp/pl comd on return.
Sentries Day - posted beyond limit of noise

during work routine. One sentry min. May require
Cover/Back Up sentry on apex in position (2)
on diagram.
Ni - two sentries at each apex scrape Comms to
tp/pl HQ (radio, cord, line) Rostas for sects and
tp/pl HQ, Thermal Imagery/Image Intensifiers.
Work routine Prep stand-to positions, shell scrapes Clear

perimeter path/fds of fire.
Siting of tripflares, claymores (comd initiated
only), arc markers Dig latrines.
Comms cord from sentries to LSWs/sect comds.
Comms cord sect comds to tp/pl comd.
Cfm Os by tp/pl comd.
Tp/pl sgts pts - feeding/sleeping, sentry rostas,
track/battle disc, resup, rubbish, wpn cleaning,
water ptls/resup, admin for future ops.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-67

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
PATROL HARBOURS
Hasty Occupied for short periods for admin,
Harbour orders, during recce phase prior to
occupying a hbr/ambush site, or as an
FRV.
Clearance ptls not deployed.
Sentries remain within perimeter.
No perimeter wire, scrapes or shelters.
Threat High - all admin/sleeping takes place in scrapes.

Low - admin can take place inside track plan.
Notes:
(1) Daytime sentry locs at limit of sound.

(2) Ni time sentry locs and stand-to loc for ‘D’ fire team LMG/LSW
during daytime.
(3) Ni time stand-to loc for ‘D’ fire team LMG/LSW.
5-68 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
SURVEILLANCE AND TARGET ACQUISITION PLAN

(STAP) AT PL LEVEL
The STAP provides a coordinated framework upon which to allocate
troops/equipment to task in order to find the enemy. At Pl level the
STAP will flow from Q5 of the commander’s estimate (what resources
are needed to accomplish each effect?), but will likely have to be
refined after Q6 (where and when do the actions take place in relation
to each other) where resources are limited. The steps to produce an
effective STAP are:
• Analyse Ground and Enemy:

• Look at ground from enemy perspective.
• Identify Key Terrain, Pattern of Life, Enemy Avenues of Ap-
proach, VA/VPs, dead ground.
• Develop the plan:

• Identify areas you need to see into and the areas in which you
want to have an effect; as well as those you have to observe in
order to make a decision (NAIs; TAIs; and DPs).
• Overlay dead ground traces from STA assets (day and night,
good and bad visibility).
• Refine the plan:

• Allocate ISTAR assets to NAIs, TAIs (e.g. Snipers; OPs; sen-
tries; UAS, etc).
• Prioritise sensors according to the enemy most likely COA.
• Identify and cover gaps by relocating existing assets, bidding for
additional ISTAR assets, clear fields of fire, use of Unmanned
Ground Sensors (UGS).
• Consider night as well as day.
• Link sensor to shooter - direct or indirect fire (FSTs, gun-groups,
tanks).
• Consider NTM of STA and fires assets.
• Consider EMCON.
• Have a back-up plan.
• Constantly review the process as a result of changes to G2

activity, Ground and Environment and CCIRs
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-69

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
CHECKLISTS COMMON TO ALL SENTRIES

1. Location of post and neighbouring posts.
2. Tactical situation, including current alert and CBRN states.
3. Names of landmarks/reference points - ranges (in m)
bearings (in mils).
4. Length of duty and time of relief.
5. Route in/out.
6. Method of relief.
7. Method of alerting commander/own troops.
8. Actions on...
9. Reporting chain.
10. Concealment.
11. Dress.
12. Equipment checklist.
• Binoculars, compass and torch.
• Communications and alarm system.
• Map, notebook and pen.
• Observation devices.
• Watch.
GROUND SENTRIES
1. Arc of observation and fire.
2. Action on suspicious movement.
3. Method of challenging.
4. RoE / Orders for opening fire.
5. Friendly patrols - times out and in, strengths.
6. Location of trip flares, wire etc.
7. Password and time it changes.
8. CBRN Threat Level and Dress State.
9. Equipment - range card.
5-70 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
PROCEDURES AND CHALLENGING

Action by Person or
Serial Action by Sentry
Group Challenged
1 Alerts his immediate

commander of the approach
of a person/group and covers
movement with his weapon
2 Waits until the person/group Halt, raises hands.
approaching is within audible
range, but not so close that the
position can be rushed, and
then orders him/them to stop
with the command
“HALT – HANDS UP”
3 Orders by voice or sign for one Person or group leader
person to approach - advances towards the
“ADVANCE ONE” sentry position.
4 Allows the unknown person Halts.

to approach close enough for
visual recognition, or to give
the challenge in a quiet voice,
and then orders him to stop -
“HALT”
5 Gives the challenge quietly eg Gives the reply
“BRAVO BRAVO” (1) - if he eg “ECHO ECHO” (1).
does not recognise the person.
Only repeat if circumstances
warrant, eg windy night.
6 If doubtful of the response, Gives the reply eg
ensure that the individual/group “ECHO ECHO”.
keep their distance and then
rechallenge.
7 Calls the remainder of the Second unknown
group forward, either as person, or the remainder
individuals: “ADVANCE ONE” of the group, advance
or altogether: “ADVANCE” to be recognised by the
- as the situation or his orders sentry, assisted by the
dictate. group leader who stays
with the sentry until all
have passed.
Notes:
1. For the sake of clarity, both challenge and reply should be given
twice. Unless otherwise directed, both challenge and reply should
consist of a single repeated letter.
2. Passwords are changed every 24 hours at 1200 hours ZULU (GMT) or
Local daily-varies operation to operation.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-71

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
SENTRY DUTY AND REPORTING

METHODS OF RANGE ESTIMATION:
• Unit of Measure
• Appearance
• Laser rangefinder/CTLS
AIDS FOR RANGE ESTIMATION:

• Group Average (Get group to estimate; take average)
• Bracketing (work out max and min distance - find mid pt)
• Halving (Half distance between observer and target, estimate range
to ½ way point. Double it)
• Key ranges (relate to another known distance (i.e. ref pt on range
card))
• Binoculars
HAND/FINGER METHOD:
• 1 Finger = 30mils
• 2 Fingers = 60mils
• 3 Fingers = 100mils
• 2 Knuckles = 80mils
• 4 Knuckles/Fist = 160mils
• Fist + Thumb = 250mils
• Hand Outstretched = 350mils
BINOCULARS’
GRATICULE:
N.B. 1 mil at
1000m = 1m
MINIMUM SENTRY ORDERS:

• Location of post, neighbouring posts and own backup/covering
sentry and chemical sentry (if deployed)
• Length of stayand time of relief
• Method of relief
• Enemy situation
• Arc of observation and fire
• Action on suspicious movement
• Method of alerting section (if different from SOP)
• Method of challenging (if different from SOP)
• Orders for opening fire
• Concealment
• Friendly patrols - times in and out
• Location of mines, trip flares etc
• Password
• Action on NBC attack (if different from SOP)
• Equipment needed
5-72 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
AIR SENTRIES
1. Air situation, including likely enemy/friendly air activity.
2. AD weapon control orders. (see page 3-39)
3. Arc of observation (2100 mils max).
4. Action on ground or CBRN attack.
5. Actions on air attack.
6. CBRN alarm signals.
7. Equipment checklist.
a. AAAD weapon.
b. Aircraft recognition material.
CHEMICAL SENTRIES
Deployment Considerations:
• Sited where they can warn unprotected persons of an
attack within 5 seconds.
• Able to observe any reactions on detector paper.
• The availability of detection and alarm systems.
• The size and spread of the unit.
• Weather conditions, including the wind direction.
• The nature of the ground.
• The most probable form of chemical attack.
• Don’t combine the chemical sentry with a tactical sentry
(unless manpower dictates otherwise).
Primary Task - Warn unprotected persons of an attack within

5 seconds.
Secondary Task - Inform commander:

• The reason for giving the alarm.
• The area attacked (or a bearing to it).
• Delivery means.
• The form of attack (liquid or vapour).
• The time of the attack.
• Monitor all detectors/detector paper and report findings.
• Make out an NBC 1 (Chem) initial observers report.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-73

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Dress - The chemical sentry must always wear full IPE

(Dress State 4R).
Method - Remain alert for any sign of chemical attack. Monitor
detector paper around post and watch and listen for
alarm such as MCAD. Apply the chemical safety rule.
The chemical sentry must be briefed on:

• The tactical situation.
• The location of his post with routes to and from.
• The times to start and end duty.
• The alarm system to use.
• Who he is to warn and their location.
• To whom he is to report; how and when.
• Action to take if the wind changes direction more than
45 degrees.
• Application of the chemical safety rule with any limitations.
• Location of other sentries.
The chemical sentry is to be equipped with:

• Alarm system.
• Comms (preferably land line).
• MCAD, LCAD, CAM, RVD.
• Detector Paper (1 and 3 colour).
• NBC 1 (Chem) reports.
• Torch.
• Watch.
• Map.
• Binoculars.
• Notebook and writing implement.
NUCLEAR OBSERVERS
Location of post and arcs to be observed (must be able to identify
direction of ground zero and take measurements).
Means of communication with CP.
Task - observations should be made in accordance with NBC1 and
reported to the Command Post immediately.
Dress - in accordance with CBRN Dress State for unit as a whole.
Equipment.
• Clock/watch with second hand.
• NBC 1 (nuclear) report and pen.
• PDRM if also acting as monitoring post.
• Comms equipment.
5-74 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
EMERGENCY ALARMS AND SIGNALS

Warning Air Attack CBRN Agents Air and CBRN
Clear
Visual Red Black Remove/

Alarm change visual
Colour signals
and CBRN Wng Rkt (3)
Shape
Visual Crossing Arms Mask Up

Signal Above Head
Audible Voice, e.g. “Air Voice Voice

Alarm Red!” Vehicle “Gas, Gas, Gas!” Horn blast for
horn Whistle Bang metal on metal. 1 min.
blasts (3 sec on, NAIAD alarm
1 sec off) Short horn/ whistle
blasts
Chemical rattle/air
horn (1 sec on, 1
sec off)
NATO Warbling siren Interrupted Steady Siren

(Civ Def) for 1 min warbling siren for 1 min
UK Warbling siren 3 rkts or 3 gongs/ Steady siren

Mainland for 1 min whistle blasts for 1 min.
only (12 secs on, 12 (3 sec intervals)
secs off)
Notes:
1. Alarms for ground attack are to be in accordance with the local

tactical situation.
2. Air raid warning (ARW) states are:
a. Red: Attack is imminent.
b. Yellow: Attack probable.
c. White: Attack unlikely.
3. Yellow/Red/Yellow rocket with whistle, but not used on the UK

mainland. Do not confuse with whistle for stand-to. There is
no NATO agreement on signals for stand-to. If whistle or horn
signal is necessary, use continuous blast.
4. Use visual signals if possible.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-75

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
CHEMICAL SAFETY RULE

EXPERIENCE Bombardment of any kind
SIGHT Hostile or unknown low flying
aircraft
SEE Suspicious:
Mist
Smoke
Droplets
Splashes
IF YOU SMELL Anything unusual
NOTICE Symptoms in yourself or in others:
Dimness of vision
Irritation of the eyes
Sudden headaches
Tightness of the chest
Running nose
Intense salivation
HEAR The Alarm
ASSUME It is a Chemical Attack
CARRY The Chemical IA Drill

OUT Sound the Alarm
Inform HQ as necessary
Notes:
These Guides are for the use of local commanders as authorised by
unit SOPs. Unmasking or the removal of IPE should not be ordered
unless operationally essential. When using the Tables:
• Always take the highest reading if a bar display is fluctuating.
• Do not order unmasking or the removal of IPE if a bar display is
increasing.
• Note that the allowed exposure time within each 24hr cycle can
be continuous or taken as the total of a series of shorter periods
providing the maximum exposure time is not exceeded.
• After a total exposure time in a 24hr period has been reached and
if the hazard persists, wait 24hrs before allowing further exposure.
If only CAM is available:
• Note that CAM will only respond to V agent at temperatures
above +5°C.
• If a 1 bar reading does not clear the display in 15 mins, order an
RVD test. If RVD shows clear, implement unmasking drills.
• Order frequent CAM readings while troops are unmasked.
If MCAD is being used in Miosis Mode, note that 1hr exposure presents
a minimal risk. This period may be extended to a maximum of 3hrs
but with increased risk of symptoms of miosis (headache, blurring and
dimming of vision).
5-76 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
CBRN
CBRN DEFENCE
CBRN Defence Principals:
• Anticipation
• Protection
• Contamination Control
• Warning
Chemical Agent Types:

• Lethal - Nerve/Blood/Choking
• Damaging - Blister
• Incapacitating - Vomiting
Routes:
• Inhalation
• Ingestion
• Absorption
• Inoculation
Categories:
• Persistent
• Non-Persistent
Delivery:
• Liquid or Vapour delivered by
• Bursting Munitions or Sprays
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-77

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
CBRN Threat Levels:

• ZERO - Belligerents have no known offensive CBRN capability
• LOW - Have capability but no indication of use in near future
• MEDIUM - CBRN weapons used in another area/strong indications
belligerents will use CBRN in immediate future
• HIGH - CBRN attack imminent
• BLACK - CBRN attack detected
1 Colour Detector Paper:

• Red for all chemical agents
3 Colour Detector Paper:

• Red - Blister (H)
• Amber - Nerve (G - Non-pers)
• Green - Nerve (V - Pers)
RVD:
• Blue - Nerve
• Red - Blister
• Brown - Unknown
• CAM - Nerve (G) and Blister (H)

• LCAD - Nerve, Blood, Blister and Choking
• MCAD - Nerve, Blood, Blister and Choking
Dress States:
• 0 - 1st set IPE within unit supply chain
• 1 - IPE carried or immediately available
• 2 - Suit worn, boots and gloves carried
• 3 - Suit and boots worn, gloves carried
• 4 - Suit, boots and gloves worn
Protection Measures:
• ZERO/LOW ZERO in open and under OHC
• MEDIUM TWO in open and under OHC
• HIGH FOUR in open/THREE under OHC
• BLACK FOUR ROMEO for all
5-78 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
NAPS: (2-stage treatment with Combopens)

• Nerve Agent Pre-Treatment Set
• 21 NAPS per packet
• Packet lasts for 7 days
Take NAPS:
• Prior to deployment
• When told to do so
• Every 8 hours
Nerve Agent Poisoning:

EARLY symptoms
• Tightness of chest
• Runny nose
• Pinpointed pupils
• Dimness of vision
LATER symptoms
• Headache
• Increased salivation
• Dizziness
• Excessive sweating
DANGER symptoms
Blister Agent Symptoms:
• Hoarseness of Throat
• Red Eyes
• Red Skin
• Eyes Closed in Pain
(Flush eyes with water within 5mins)
Combopens:
• Issued 3
• 15mins between pens
• Inject and hold for 10secs (Incorrect use = Atropine
Poisoning)
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-79

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Atropine Poisoning Symptoms:

• Rapid Pulse Rate – over 100
• Very dry mouth and throat
• Hot dry skin
• Enlarged Pupils
Unmasking Drills:
• Liquid test (Detector Paper)
• Vapour test (RVD)
• 2-man sniff test (sniff/5 min GSR on and observe/5min GSR off)
• Authorisation
• Individual sniff test
If equipped with CAM the Hasty method may be employed BUT only
if risk is worth taking as CAM does not detect unknowns only H and G
ORDERED to change Canister:

• After 3 weeks in Chemical Environment
• After 4 months wear
• After 6 Chemical Attacks
When YOU change Canister:

• You feel the effects when fitted
• Resistance to breathing becomes excessive
• Canister is immersed in water
• Canister rattles when shaken
Nuclear Explosion Characteristics:

Flash-Heat-Blast/Shock-Radiation-EMP-Cloud
Types: Air, Surface, Sub-surface and Exo-atmospheric Burst
Nuclear Decontamination:
Dust, Shake, Wipe and Brush
Radiation Sickness:
Nausea, Vomiting, Loss of appetite and General Malaise
5-80 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

COUNTER-SURVEILLANCE/EMISSION CONTROL MEASURES (CSCM/EMCON)
Radio Non Comms Eqpt White Light ILLUM Fire Control Vehicle Lights Noise/Heat/Mov
Measures Sources
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
Electronic Silence. Total silence. No None. Comds Firing only with None, incl IR. Total silence. No heat

1
No Txs, all potential elec Txs, even for should specify if trip permission from Brake lights sources or veh mov. No
emitters switched testing. flares may be set. imposing comd. should be running of engines or
off. disconnected. gens. Min mov of pers.
Radio Silence Min essential testing White light for Firing in self- Convoy lights Min essential use of
(includes PRR). only. Silence broken emergency defence if under only. No IR. engines / gens. Min mov
Silence broken for specific ops. engagements. Re- direct en fire. of pers / veh. Usually
2 if op sit justifies Lasers may be imposed afterwards Other fire only with ordered at unit level.
it, but reimposed used. Comds should permission. Consider air bottle
afterwards. Radios specify if trip flares charging for cooled TI.
PROTECTION
on, Txters inhibited / may be set.

disabled.
Silence Lifted. As for 2 until first op, Normal use Normal fire control. Side and Normal use and mov.
Normal Use. then measure lifted. convoy lights.
3
IR only if
specified.
Radio Silence less N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

4
HCDR.
Note: see SOHB p 4.5_1
5-81
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
POTENTIAL IED/MINEFIELD INDICATORS

COLOURS: The enemy may provide clues unwittingly - visible parts of
the IED which could include det-cord, receiver, main charge, container
etc.
MARKERS: On the side of the road/track which could include tyres,
ribbon, tape, plastic bag, bottles, compound walls, trees, telegraph
poles etc. If you don’t like what you see, trust your instincts!
SHAPES: Outlines that are not normal in nature, new dirt or gravel
piles, obstacles that are in the road to channel your movement.
ATMOSPHERICS: Lack of vehicle traffic in a normally busy area. Lack
of local nationals. People fleeing an area. Presence of the abnormal
and absence of the normal.
Can you be targeted? Be self critical - have you used this route
before?. Has this route been trafficked by LNs recently? Are you being
predictable?
IEDS/MINES
Actions on Possible IED (4Cs)
CONFIRM: What, Where, Size, Details of incident.
“COMMANDERS TIME OUT”
CLEAR: Move personnel and vehicles away from the suspected device,
only searching your routes out to the safe distance indicated in table
below (unless mission is specifically ‘Mark and Avoid’ when device
should be marked as detailed below). When moving to ‘Clear’ consider
identification of vulnerable points and areas (see table next page).
CORDON: Keep all personnel and vehicles out. Appoint a Cordon 2IC
(e.g. Pl 2IC) to ensure integrity of the cordon. Carry out 5 and 20m
checks of your ICP location and 5 and 20m search of cordon positions if
static. You DO NOT need to be static for an effective cordon. Be aware
of being targeted by using predictable locations or vulnerable points and
areas (see table next page).
CONTROL: SITREP to Ops Room to task/co-ord external agencies.
Appoint an ICP LO (e.g. Incident Comds Team 2IC) to control access to
ICP and log or report arrival/departure of specialist agencies.
5-82 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Characteristics of Sign
• Regularity. An effect caused by straight lines, arches and other
geometrical shapes being pressed into the ground leaving marks
not normally found in nature.
• Flattening. General levelling or depression caused by pressure on
an area - differs from immediate surroundings (i.e. bed space, boot
print on grass, where someone has sat down, etc).
• Transfer. Deposit carried forward over an area after the target has
moved from one area to another (e.g. mud, sand, grass, water,
etc).
• Colour Change. The difference in colour or texture from
surrounding area (e.g. upturned leaves).
• Discardables. Materials that have been ‘cast off’either intentionally
or not (i.e. rations, packaging, equipment, body waste, blood).
• Disturbance. Any other change or rearrangement of the natural
state of an area caused by the target’s passage (i.e. Clearing of
leaf litter or vegetation, disturbed insect life, etc).
IED/MINEFIELD marking signs and local markings:

• Painted rocks, red pointing to danger and white to safe areas.
• Look out for anything unusual that may indicate danger.
• Cairns of stones marking dangerous areas.
• Less obvious mines or UXO may be well marked.
Always stay alert for other combat indicators:

Local Ground Sign Blast Mine Debris
Behaviour Signature
Not using fields Disturbance Scorching Parts of mines
Not using Patterns Craters Packaging
routes Discolouration Strike mark Tripwires
Injured
animals
Personal Minefield Extraction

MOUNTED P-MEK
Kit P-MEK DISMOUNTED
• Tripwire feeler - 14 gauge wire • Additional red and white
• Mine Prodder markers
• White safe lane markers
• Red mine or suspect area
markers
• Night route marking cyalumes
• Aide memoir
• Storage pouch
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-83

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
SUSPECT DEVICE CLEARANCE DISTANCES
DEVICE SIZE URBAN RURAL

HANDHELD 100m 200m
SUITCASE 200m 400m
VEHICLE 400m 800m
N.B. These distances are to be used as a guide - applying them slavishly

every time will make you predictable and you may become a target.
Beware also of the likelihood of secondary devices planted to target
potential ICPs.
Evacuation should preferably be out of line of sight of the device.
5 AND 20 METRE CHECKS

Five metre checks must be conducted every time a patrol member stops.
Twenty metre checks must be conducted when a patrol goes firm (static)
for more than 5 minutes.
5m and 20m Checks
5m 20m
Identify a position in which to go All team members carry out a visual

firm. Carry out a visual check using check using SUSAT/ACOG etc out
SUSAT/optics, checking for bricks to 20m.
missing from walls, new string/wire, The Team Commander then directs
mounds of fresh soil/dirt or other 2 personnel to conduct an isolation
suspicious signs. Check the area of the area to at least 20 m radius
at ground level through to above around all personnel/ vehicles.
head height.
Before occupying the position carry The pair, with ECM Equipment,
out a thorough visual and physical move forward in single file to carry
check for a radius of 5m. Be sys- out an isolation circle of 20m radius
tematic, take a little time and show from all personnel/vehicles. Both
curiosity. Use touch and, at night, observe and physically check
white light. the ground by zig-zagging across
the circle. Remaining pair provide
cover until the circle is cleared for
occupancy
Any obstacles must be physically checked for command wires. Fences,

walls, wires, posts and the ground immediately underneath must be care-
fully felt by hand (without gloves).
5-84 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
MINE AWARENESS
Many of the basic factors/drills listed below for countering mines apply
equally to other forms of explosive hazards. Stay alert, use your eyes.’
Basics
• DO NOT leave the hard standing.
• DO NOT park or drive on verges.
• DO NOT enter uncleared buildings.
• DO NOT use uncleared routes.
• DO NOT become a military tourist.
• DO NOT pick up souvenirs.
Where minefields are found

• Confrontation lines.
• Borders.
• Old military positions.
• Strategic areas.
• Unmade roads and tracks.
• Disused buildings.
LOOK - For any visible signs of mine action or combat indicators.

FEEL - For any protruding fuses or mine components.
PROD - Every 25mm across a 0.6m lane at a 30º angle to the horizontal
and, if ground conditions permit, to a depth of 75mm.
Do not ‘stab’ the ground or use excessive force but prod slowly and
firmly.
Adopt the prone position with legs crossed. Remove webbing and
lay weapon by side.
If you find a mine.
Mark and avoid. Use red markers 300mm back from the suspect area.
Move around. Do not step over or touch.
Do not uncover to identify mine type.
Do not cut or tie tape to tripwires.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-85

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
MINE ENCOUNTER DRILL
STOP – Stop moving immediately.

WARN – Issue warning to others nearby “STOP MINES”.
REPORT – Report by radio “CONTACT MINE-STRIKE, WAIT
OUT”.
ASSESS – Plan of action: stay put or self extract.
What other mines or indicators can be seen.
Location of the nearest hard standing.
EOD or Engr assistance available.
MEDEVAC available/required.
Are other agencies required. Enemy action.
Casualties.
REPORT – Send 10 Liner.
ACT – Stay still and await assistance

OR
If extracting from mined area then
‘LOOK - FEEL - PROD’ to safety.
If you can use a metal detector then
‘LOOK - FEEL - METAL DETECT’ to safety.
How to Look - Feel - Detect

LOOK - For any visible signs of mine action or combat indicators.
FEEL - For any protruding fuses or mine components.
PROD - Every 25mm across a 0.6m lane at a 30º angle to the horizontal
and, if ground conditions permit, to a depth of 75mm.
Do not ‘stab’ the ground or use excessive force but prod slowly and
firmly.
Adopt the prone position with legs crossed. Remove webbing and lay
weapon by side.
If you find a mine

Mark and avoid. Use red markers
300mm back from the suspect area.
Move around. Do not step over or
touch.
Do not, uncover to identify mine
type.
Do not, cut or tie tape to tripwires.
5-86 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
When an IED Explodes

STOP Movement:
• Expect secondary devices.

• Expect ambush.
• Extract casualty.
• Try not to administer first aid in contact area of explosion expect
• secondary devices.
• Do not deviate from PROVEN ROUTE.
• Infrom higher HQ.
• If necessary SEARCH into cover - expect secondarydevices.
Treat as an ambush
• More explosions, direct or indirect enemy fire may follow.

• Return fire in accordance with stated Rules of Engagement (RoE).
• Move out of the kill zone as directed by your commander.
• Move to the best location in order to reconsolidate and further
assess the situation.
• Can you be targeted by a secondary device?
• Keep security - 360º at all times.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-87

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
EOD REQUEST PRIORITIES

IMMEDIATE. An imminent threat to human life that cannot be avoided
or protected against, or requires extraction of people
from suspect areas.
URGENT. Pre Explosion. A high threat to human life that can only
be temporarily evacuated, protectively screened, placed
OOB or where secondary hazards, such as proximity to
bulk fuel or critical installations, poses serious threat to
operations or where exploitation of IED components or
unusual UXO is required.
URGENT. Post Explosion. Where there is a high threat of
secondary devices, the requirement to extract critical
assets from suspect areas or the opportunity to exploit
remaining IED components.
MINOR. Where UXO slows or reduces the unit’s ability to
manoeuvre and complete its mission or threatens
important non-critical assets of value.
ROUTINE. Where EOD sp to conduct clearance of UXO, that poses
little threat to life or operations, or sp to planned ops is
required.
NO THREAT. Where the presence of UXO poses no threat to life or
ops and clearance can be conducted in turn.
WARNINGS
PUSH OUT! DEVICE MAY EXPLODE.
TOUCHING COMPONENTS DESTROYS INT.
DO NOT TOUCH UXO, IT MAY BE UNSTABLE.
FAILURE TO EXPLOIT KEEPS THE ENEMY AHEAD.
DO NOT CUT WIRES, COLLAPSING CIRCUITS CAN KILL.
5-88 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Identification of Vulnerable Points (VPs)

and Vulnerable Areas (VAs)
Use the mnemonic CAGE
CHANNELLED Are we channelled? Are we being forced

to go this way?
AIMING MARKER Is there an aiming marker? If so observe
likely firing points (FPs) or OP locs.
GROUND Is the ground disturbed in any way? Does
the ground lend itself to an attack (choke
point, overlooked)? Have we set a pattern
by travelling over this ground before?
ENVIRONMENT What are the atmospherics (LN in the
area)? Look for absence of the normal;
presence of the abnormal.
Identification of Vulnerable Points: Vulnerable Points are those points

on the route where it is particularly advantageous for the adversary to
position an ambush, using either IEDs or SAF, or both. Likely places
are:
• Culverts and Bridges.
• High banked stretches of road.
• Routes dominated by high ground.
• Junctions.
• Buildings and walls near route.
• Parked vehicles.
• Prominent markers on the route.
• Location of previous attack.
• Anywhere where vehicles slow down.
• Anywhere you are channelled.
Identification of Vulnerable Areas: Vulnerable Areas are those areas

on the route suitable for an IED or SAF attack. A VA is defined when a
combination of the following is present:
• Long open stretches of road.
• Areas with good enemy fields of view.
• Good enemy escape routes.
• Lack of civilian infrastructure.
• Urban/Rural interface.
• Natural obstacle between Firing Point and Contact Area.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-89

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
VP 360°
The VP 360 check is conducted when there is a high threat of CPIED,
CWIED or RC and is conducted using 5 men to ensure full ECM
coverage. This also allows the ground Commander the opportunity
to get eyes on the suspect area, and to assess the situation before
deploying C/S forward to conduct Op BARMA. Check for:
• Possible Firing Points.
• Surface laid/rapidly laid CWIEDs and CPIEDs.
• Suspicious activity and individuals who might be scouting the patrol
or moving to a Firing Point (FP).
• Look into the VA/VP for potential aiming markers or other signs of
IED activity.
Actions on prior to starting VP 360 Check.

• Stop Short before approaching a VP/VA. (50m/min).
• Conduct 5 and 25m checks.
• Dominate the ground and put top cover up from the vehicles.
• Form up VP 360 party (if threat of CPIED or CWIED).
• Manpack the ECM equipment (As per SOP).
• Conduct VP 360 clearing high threat side first. This is the
commander’s decision based on the Intelligence picture, tactical
situation and experience.
• Front Man marks turns with a marker.
• Front man searches safe route using Vallon or equivalent (MD) and
marks accordingly (including turns) with markers.
• Second man also carries Vallon and a hook, used to check drainage
ditches and water courses for sub surface Command Wires (CW).
• Rear man picks up or destroys markers.
5-90 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Visual search for Route Out
evidence of devices
buried in route or dug Primary Search Area
in CW.
MD sweep and

visual search for
evidence of buried Notes:
devices or CW. VP Where S2 or
Lead men are history suggests
staggered to allow CWIED/CPIED
“High Threat Side”

for overlap. push out towards
Distance
100m to reduce the
threat
effects of a blast on
Front man Distance dependent
PROTECTION
the VP 360 party.

places threat
marker, dependent Distances should
rear man be varied to reduce
picks up to the risk of VOIED
ensure full 360 targeting by pattern

isolation. cover setting at the stop
from Top short point and on
Marker Cover the VP 360.
5-91
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
5-92
MD sweep and visual
search for evidence of
buried devices,
markers, RC antennae
or wires.
Lead pair are
staggered to allow for
overlap.
Distance
threat Route Out
dependent
Primary Search Area
VP
PROTECTION
Visual search for

evidence of devices
buried in route or dug 360
in CW. cover
from Top

Cover
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Pins are left at the
crossover of the road.
Distance Visual search for

threat

evidence of devices
dependent Distance
buried in route or dug
threat
in CW.
dependent
VP
Route Out and

PROTECTION
Route In must
overlap.
MD sweep and visual

search for evidence of
buried devices,
markers, RC antennae
or wires.
Lead pair are
staggered to allow for
overlap.
5-93
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
OP BARMA
Aim. Dismounting from vehicles is the most effective way of finding
IEDs before they are initiated. Op BARMA is the operational name given
to the C-IED procedure for conducting dismounted Vulnerable Point
(VP) Vulnerable Area (VA) checks. The procedure is adaptable and is
set out as either a full Op BARMA (4-man drill) or a less comprehensive
2-man drill.
KEY DEFINITIONS
Vulnerable Points. VPs are those points where it is considered
particularly likely for the enemy to position an IED. Units should not get
fixated on looking down, as devices are frequently placed in walls and
trees, or above head height.
Notwithstanding this, the main VPs are:

• Wadi Crossings.
• Track Junctions.
• Culverts and Bridges.
• Mouseholes.
• Previous Positions.
• Fire Support Positions and Likely Positions of Cover.
Vulnerable Areas. Vulnerable Areas (VA) are those areas where

pattern setting allows the enemy to predict with a degree of certainty
that FF will use them again.
These include:
• Linear Features.
• Previously Used Desert Tracks and Patrol Routes.
• Frequently Used Positions.
• Long Open Stretches of Road.
• Compound Interiors.
• Canalised Routes.
• Compounds in Close Proximity to a Route.
OP BARMA PROCEDURE
Actions prior to starting Op BARMA:
• Stop short before approaching a VP/VA. (50 - 100m where possible,
varying this distance to aid deception). At all times, a full suite of
ECM is to be carried by the dismounted element.
• Conduct 5 and 20m checks.
• Dominate the ground and put top cover up from the vehicles.
5-94 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
• Form up VP 360 party if threat of CPIED, CWIED or remoted RCIED.

• Manpack the ECM if available.
• Conduct VP 360 clearing ‘high threat’ side first.
• Once VP 360 complete, continue to Op BARMA as necessary along
remainder of VP/ VA.
WALKING VEHICLES THROUGH A VULNERABLE

POINT (VP) – 4 MAN PROCEDURE
Prior to starting the search, the lead vehicle should stop 50-100m short
of the VP / VA. One or two road men should exit the vehicle and, using
equipment, search around to the front of the vehicle creating a working
area from which to commence the drill. A distance of 10m between
searchers is to be maintained.
a. Hedge Row Men.
Visual search for

evidence of markers,
BEEK Dog
command wires and
RC antennae.
Dir of
Travel
Hedge Men
5m
Visual search of the
route out to 5m in BEEK Handler
front, looking for
10m
ground signs relating
to all types of IEDs. Detector sweep to detect
VOIEDs, battery pack,
mines and MILORD main
Road charges. Detectors must
Man overlap.
10m
Road Primary Search Area

Man Secondary Search Area
10m
Detector Sweep
Comd
Approx Width (6m) ACTIONS ON POSSIBLE IED
of confirmed 1. STOP All forward movement
searched area. 2. Conduct 4Cs Op
3. Request EOD Sp
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-95

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
• Position yourself on the side of the route away from the

obvious wheel ruts.
• First, examine the route out to 5m in front, looking for ground
signs relating to all types of IEDs including devices that may
have been placed above ground level such as in trees or on
top of walls.
• Second, scan the verges on the other side of the road
and then your side of the road out to 10m to identify local
markings, aiming markers, CWs, or RC antennae.
• Third, remember your own personal protection and move
forward in 5m bounds. Use detectors to sweep for VOIEDs,
battery packs, mines or MILORD main charges.
• Throughout, consider trip wires at various heights, including
above head height (to catch antennae).
• Whenever possible a full suite of ECM is to be carried by the
dismounted element.
Road Men:
• Walk on the outside of obvious wheel ruts, keeping 10m
between searchers.
• First, visually scan the route 5m ahead to identify evidence of
disturbed earth and buried devices.
• Second, scan the verges out to 10m to identify local
markings, aiming markers, CWs, or RC antennae.
• Third, move forward in 5m bounds using either VALLON or
HORN to find any VOIEDs, mines or MILORD main charges.
Historically they have most likely been found in wheel ruts or
near the centre of the route.
Considerations. The following must be taken into consideration
before conducting a four-man BARMA drill:
• The searched route must overlap; each individual’s sector
should physically overlap by 0.5m with another sector. This
will give a safe lane approximately 6m wide.
• The spacing of searchers is to be balanced between
protection from explosion, overlapping search areas, and
remaining within the ECM bubble.
• The best all-round compromise is shown in the diagram, i.e.
the lead searchers having a min of 5m between each other
and affording the following searchers 10 m spacing. This
ensures that searched areas overlap.
• The commander must know the largest vehicle width in
his patrol to ensure that area is searched
Limit of Exploitation. Determined by the ground commander, but
should be a minimum of 50m beyond the limit of the VP.
5-96 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
WALKING VEHICLES THROUGH A VULNERABLE

POINT (VP) - 2 MAN PROCEDURE
When walking vehicles through the VP, searchers should:
Dir of
Travel
BEEK Dog
Visual search for

evidence of markers,
Visual search for command wires and
evidence of devices RC antennae.
buried in route or dug
in CW.
Detector sweep to detect
VOIEDs, battery pack,
mines and MILORD main
5m charges. Detectors must
overlap.
10m
BEEK Handler
Primary Search Area

Secondary Search Area
Comd Detector Sweep
ACTIONS ON POSSIBLE IED

1. STOP All forward movement
2. Conduct 4Cs Op
3. Request EOD Sp
• Walk on the outside of obvious wheel ruts.

• Keep 10m between searchers.
• First, visually scan the route 5m ahead to identify evidence of
disturbed earth & buried devices.
• Second, visually scan the verges out to approx 10m in order to locate
local markers, aiming markers, CWs, and RC antennae.
• Third, use either VALLON or HORN (depending on the threat) to find
any VOIED(PP), mines or MILORD main charges. They are likely to
be in wheel ruts or near the centre of the route.
• Fourth, remember your personal protection and move forward in 5m
bounds.
• Throughout, consider trip wires at various heights, including
antennae heights.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-97

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
COMPOUND CLEARANCE AND OP KALA

Compound clearance can be conducted as routine activity or used to
target specific compounds as part of a deliberate operation. The tactical
situation will dictate the appropriate level of force but troops must be
flexible and adapt to each unique situation.
COMPOUND CATEGORY
• GREEN (Occupied) A compound that is occupied by local nationals
(LN) and a normal pattern of life can be observed by troops. In such
circumstances troops may perceive a reduced risk of VOIEDs.
• AMBER (Unoccupied) An unoccupied compound presents an
increased risk of mines/IEDs and boobytraps. During deliberate
operations expert advice should be sought from Bde RESA.
• RED. When troops are in contact or under immediate threat.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Enemy TTPs. IEDs/Mines or Booby Traps:
• Obvious approach routes - Choke points and VPs.
• Ladder locations - IEDs in ground walls and on roofs.
• Walls - Highest and lowest points, breaks in walls and mouse holes.
• Door Way / Entrance Points.
• Roof Top / FSG Positions.
Method of entry:
• Existing entrances. These could include doorways, previous assault
breaching sites or where the walls are crumbling due to age / lack
of repair.
• Grand Nationaling. This is the rapid entry to multiple compounds in
quick succession by use of ladders to climb over the compound wall.
• Assault Breaching. Assault breaching can enhance the tactical
advantage during deliberate RED options by providing a shock effect
caused by the explosive charge.
• Intermediate search teams. If the clearance is a deliberate operation
and requires consultation with an ASA or Bde RESA.
• Advanced Search Teams (ASTs). If the threat from IEDs is assessed
to be high then the clearance should be planned and conducted by
specialist EOD teams.
Electronic Counter Measures (ECM). Consider the use of ECM if
issued. Static troops can remove ECM packs but must ensure antennas
are vertical and not screened by walls and trees to ensure maximum
coverage.
5-98 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Op KALA
Op KALA. Is the operational name given to the CIED activity conducted
in compounds and buildings. Op KALA is the systematic search of
ground, wall surface areas and doorways and openings. It is broken
down into 5 phases which are;
• Phase 1 - Secure - surrounding area should be dominated and
secured.
• Phase 2 - Isolation. treated in the same manner as a VP.
• Phase 3 - Clearance TO the Entry Point (EP).Stop short, Call Out
occupants, establish safe lane.
• Phase 4 - Clearance of the Entry Point. The immediate area
surrounding the EP should be search prior to the EP itself.
• Phase 5 - Clearance of building.. Once entry has been gained the
Building may be searched.
COMPOUND RED
Compound RED Principles. The following principles should be
considered when planning and conducting any RED compound
clearance operations:
• Surprise: IPE, distractions, route selection, assault breaching.
• Speed: Efficient, Mission command, well-practiced drills.
• Momentum: Anticipation, Maintain the offensive.
• Control: Time for QBOs, All informed.
• Aggression: Fighting spirit, Escalate and de-escalate level of
violence, Damage limitation.
• Accurate Shooting: Train early, Limited supply of ready ammunition.
• Awareness: 360 battle space.
• Thoroughness: dead spots, detainees, MPE.
• Flexibility: rehearsals, casevac plan, Expect hand to hand combat.
• Team Work
Compound RED Clearance Phases. Compound RED is conducted
in 7 phases:
• Investment.
• Break-in / Compound Entry.
• Initial Clearance.
• Room / Building Clearance.
• Compound Secure.
• Regroup.
• Re-org.
• Material Personnel Exploitation (MPE).
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-99

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
ROUTE PROVING AND CLEARING

Talisman is a route proving and IED clearance capability. A Tp
can SEARCH, DESTROY and REINSTATE.
Talisman Tp comprises:
• 4 x MASTIFF: with Remote Weapons System; Mast-mounted

camera; TI/II; Protected eyes.
• 2 x BUFFALO: with Rummage Arm (for inspecting devices);
mine protected.
• 2 x High Mobility Engineer Excavator (HMEE) (protected
LWT) for Route reinstatement.
• 2 x PANAMA: Remote Ground Penetrating Radar.
• 2 x TALON: Clearance Robot.
• 2 X T-HAWK MUAV: ISTAR.
C2: OPCOM – CO Engrs; TACON – SUPPORTED unit.
Scaling: 3 x Tps per Bde. Under normal circumstances two of the

three will be available for tasking with the third undergoing rehab.
Role:
• Talisman is primarily designed to PROVE routes. Talisman

seeks to plan a route to an objective which minimises the
chance of IEDs through dynamic route selection (IPB).
• The chosen route will be classified Red, Amber, or Green to
specify areas which exceed the acceptable threat and must be
searched to CLEAR.
• Talisman can CLEAR whole routes. However, this can be a
very slow business and they only remained cleared so long as
over-watch is maintained.
5-100 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
(AAAD) WEAPONS CONTROL STATES
Factors to Consider:
Air Threat:
• As briefed in Os.
• A/c types to expect? AGM?
• FGA (FW).
• Hel (RW).
• UAV (conventional and Improv).
• Civ a/c.
• RoE? Wpn control states for AD and AAAD sys?
Coord/integrate with:
• Any AD units in AO (ensure comprehension of system capabilities
if not familiar (could be non-UK sys)).
• Flanking forces AAAD (mutual sp).
Air IPB:
• Air MCs and AAs.
• Site best wpn sys with max KAs.
• Balance concealment with arcs of fire.
• Min 3km arcs of observation.
Dedicated AD Tps/Comds/Sentries.
Group wep sys together (conc of fire).
Air Attack Warning signal? Whistle/klaxon/veh horn.
Sys/Weps:
• Ratio of dedicated AD weps dependent on level of air threat.
• Favour GPMG/HMG (better range) but consider LMG/LSW/Rifles.
• Avoid use of GMG (low velocity ineff).
• Veh mounts provide better platforms and prot.
• Max use of tracer (1B1T optimum) Dedicate belts/mags for AD use
and mark. 50 rnd bursts. Max spare brls.
• LSW/Rifles set to automatic. 30 rnd bursts.
• Consider use of ATGW (Javelin is eff vs slow moving Hel).
• CR2: 120mm is eff vs slow moving Hel. 7.62mm CG also useful.
TOGS good for acquisition.
• WR/CVR(T) less effective (non stabilised sys).
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-101

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Weapon Control States

• Given in Os.
• Can be specific to a/c type eg: ‘UAV: Weapons Tight; Hel:
Weapons Free’.
Wpn Control
Ser Meaning
State
(a) (b) (c)
1 WPNS HOLD Wpn systems may only fire in self def, or
in response to a formal order, or if friendly
tps/ntls being def are seen to be under dir
air attack.
2 WPNS TIGHT Wpn systems may only engage those
ac which are positively ident as hostile
or which commit a hostile act. This
is the normal WCS in con airspace.
Engagements may take place if the ac
is positively visually ident as hostile or
is committing a hostile act. IFF must
therefore be supplemented by thermal or
vis recognition.
3 WPNS FREE Wpn systems may engage all ac not
positively ident as friendly. This is
the normal WCS in clear airspace.
Engagement may take place if:
a. Vis Only Systems. The tgt is either
not visually recognised or it commits a
hostile act.
b. Systems with IFF. No
response is received from the tgt.
Systems with IFF may therefore make
vis, thermal or radar engagements.
Engagement
• Ideally before a/c releases wpns.
• Eff rng for 5.56/7.62: 1000m. Engage at 1500m for approaching
tgts. 1500m/2000m for HMG.
• Sights set 1000m (GP/L/HMG); 800m for rifle/LSW.
• Conc fire. Long bursts. Do not engage FGA going away.
• FGA fwd lead: 30 a/c lengths in front @ 1000m.
• UAV/Hel/Slow a/c: 6 a/c lengths in front @1000m.
• Cooling/cleaning cycle for brls: Bore/gas plug.
5-102 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
DIGGING
Stages:
Stage 1 - Fire trench dug (½ to 6 hours by hand).
Stage 2 -
Trench excavation complete, including shelter bay with
overhead protection (OHP) (2 to 24 hours by hand).
Stage 3 -
Position complete, including revetting, OHP and
communications trenches (8 to 36 hrs by hand).
Explosive Digging1
• Mark Outline. Spitlock battle trenches; dig channel one spade’s

width around larger pits.
• Charge Size. Large pits - 0.25 - 0.75kg (0.5 - 0.75 block) PE7
(subject to trial). Battle trenches - 100gms (1 segment) PE7 per hole.
• Hole Spacing. Holes 1 to 1½ their depth apart in staggered rows or
concentric circles. Minimum depth 0.6 m from edge of excavation,
except in battle trenches.
• 2-Man Battle Trench. 3 charges 0.9 m deep on trench centre line, 1
in middle and others 0.6 m either side.
• Safety. Minimum safe distance 100 m for charges up to 2 kg (peace
time).
LWT Digging. Will excavate 4 man battle trench in approximately 20

minutes.
BATTLE TRENCHES - STANDARD DIMENSIONS
Width Finished 0.60m

If to be revetted, dig to 0.75m
Depth To ground level, or top of parapet: 1.5m
Parapet Minimum 1.5m width of Compacted soil
Elbow Rest 0.45m wide; 0.3m deep
Overhead Cover Minimum 0.45m depth of compacted soil
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-103

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS (Standard Designs)

Dimensions shown are those of the un-revetted excavation. Dotted
lines are additional excavation when SHS not used. All anchor wires
are omitted for clarity.
a. Revetment Using CGI/SHS

Note:
Revetment Pickets
SHS = Split Hairp
0.6-0.9m spacing
Maximum Shelter
0.9m between
revetment pickets
SHS may be used at

both ends
Minimum 100mm overlap
between sheets
Revetment pickets at all
joints
Minimum 6 strands of windlassed 14 gauge wire

buried in a 0.3m deep trench
Minimum length = twice depth of trench
Minimum one corrugation overlap
Minimum 0.3m (normal 0.4m) into floor of trench
Note. CGI = Corrugated Galvanized Iron.

SHS = Split Hairpin Shelter
5-104 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
b. Overhead Cover Using CGI/SHS
CGI supported on 1.8m 0.45 m

angle iron pickets at
maximum 0.4m spacing.
1.5 m
CGI corrugations at right
angles to pickets.
Base of SHS must be

anchored in position by
an angle iron picket. Section A-A
Note. If timber is used

in place of angle iron
0.3 m
pickets to support
revetting or OHP, the
minimum diameter is 1.5 m
75mm.
c. 2 Man Battle Trench
Section A-A
Elbow rest
A
Fire bay Shelter bay Fire bay Shelter bay 0.75 m
1.5 m 2.3 m 1.5 m 2.3 m
Stores: Without SHS With SHS

CGI sheets 1.8 x 1.2 m Nil 2
CGI sheets 1.8 x 0.6 14 (or) 3
SHS sheets 1.2 m wide Nil 6
Angle iron pickets 1.8 m 17 5
Sandbags 45 12
14 gauge wire 10kg 2.5kg
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-105

d. 4-man Battle Trench (using the stores listed below)
5-106
A
Elbow rest
Fire bay Shelter bay Fire bay 0.75 m
1.5 m Up to 4.5 m 1.5 m

PROTECTION
A
Stores Without SHS With SHS Without SHS With SHS
CGI sheets 1.8 x 1.2 Nil 4 Angle iron pickets 0.6 m 22 21
CGI sheets 1.8 x 0.6 m 26 (or) 7 Sandbags 110 36
SHS sheets 1.2 m wide Nil 10 14 gauge wire 17 kg 4 kg

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
FORCE PROTECTION ENGINEER AIDE MEMOIRE

General
The high threat from direct and indirect fire is likely to endure in the
foreseeable future and it is vital that deployed troops know what
protective measures are available. Everybody needs to be aware of the
different thicknesses of various materials that are required to prevent
penetration by rounds and fragments, as well as being able to build
effective protective structures and use sandbags correctly. Further
advice will be available from Royal Engineers, who may also be able to
complete more complex constructions.
Protective Thickness of Materials
The table below details some recently trialled measures that have
been shown to protect against specified threats.
Threat System to protect from threats
7.62mm 4x5mm steel 5mm steel Sandbag/

x 54 plates /250mm 2x5mm steel
air gap/
2x5mm steel
7.62mm 5mm steel/ Sandbag/

API 250mm 2x5mm
air gap/4x steel
5mm steel
0.5” Sandbag/ 460mm 5x100mm 1x430mm

4x5mm steel sand/ concrete concrete
2x5mm steel blocks/ block
4x5mm steel (end on)
14.5mm 460mm sand/ 4x100mm 460mm

API 2x5mm steel concrete aggregate/
blocks/ 2x5mm steel
4x5mm steel
120mm Hesco Bastion 150mm

Mortar Reinforced
Fragments Concrete
122mm 200mm rein-

Rocket forced concrete
Fragments (1m stand off)
Additional Points
Wet Sand. Fragments penetrate further into wet sand than dry sand. If
wet sand is used, twice the thickness is required.
Fill Material. Well graded aggregate should be used in preference to
sand where possible. Both however, are preferable to topsoil.
Single vs Multi-Layers. A single layer of a material provides more
protection than the equivalent thickness in multiple layers (e.g. 10mm
thick steel plate prevents more fragments than 2x5mm thick steel
plates).
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-107

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
PROTECTIVE SLOTS FOR A VEHICLES

CHALLENGER Type A Type B Type C
1 Depth of slot 1.60m 1.60m 1.00m

2 Width of slot 4.5m 4.5m 4.5m
3 Length of slot 8.50m 8.50m 8.50m
4 Overall length 21.5m 15.0m 12.5m
5 Parapet height - - 0.60m
6 Time to dig (1) 30 mins 65 mins 50 mins
CVR(T)

WARRIOR

430 SERIES

Notes:
(1) Type A = Tank slot, Type B = Spoil Removed, Type C = Parapet.
(2) Type A using BEMA (Blade Earth Moving Attachment), others
using MWT.
(3) Dimensions and timings do not include space for ammunition
vehicle, or shelter and ammunition bays.
(4) The pit should normally be revetted to stop collapse during
firing.
5-108 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Insider Threat
Details on Insider Threat (I/T) considerations, diagrams and behavioural
indicators can be found on AKX and in DN 13/01 Op CARDEL and ISAF
insider threat v2 (HERRICK specific until superseded). Information on
developing skills to understand human characteristics can be found in
Soldier First – Combat Hunter 2012 available on AKX.
Conceptual Framework
PREVENT REACT
INSIDER
PREPARE
DETER RESPOND RECOVER
DETECT
EXPLOIT
• Prepare. Plan each operation before any activity is conducted

alongside Indigenous Forces (IF). Assess threat, vulnerability and
risk, implement risk mitigation measures, develop messaging,
rehearse and learn lessons.
• Deter. Adopting measures to reduce the likelihood of an Insider
Attack. This includes building and maintaining rapport, enforcing
access procedures and arming policy, challenging and enforcing
protection TTPs.
• Detect. Identification of the indicators and warning signs of a
potential, developing or imminent.
• Insider Attack, and disseminating threat warnings.
• Respond. Immediate Action (IA) drills in response to a developing
threat or Insider Attack.
• Concentrate Force rapidly. Immediate and decisive concentration
of combat capability and surveillance assets will protect personnel in
the immediate area and deter future attacks.
• Control. A single incident commander (FP Comd initially) to co-
ordinate response including use of other units in the vicinity.
• Warn and Report.
• Contain and neutralise the threat. Limit attacker’s ability to
manoeuvre, then clear contained area.
• Conduct a combined response. Coordinate with partnered IF
where possible.
• Recover and exploit. Stabilise the situation, gather evidence.
Manage consequences, engage with partnered IF, reinforce morale,
resume mission, conduct/enable follow-up.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-109

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
General Considerations
• Primary mission is to work with IF not force pro (FP).
• J2 update – external threat and salient IF concerns.
• IF cultural and religious considerations.
• BAE for visited location – entry points, ERV and E-HLS, choke
points, concealed areas.
• ISR coverage.
• IF activities and laydown in visited location.
• Posture, presence, profile.
• Casevac plan.
• Comms.
• Rehearsal.
Guardian Angel Positioning

• The GA should be sited where he can provide optimal protection
to his colleagues. This may be overwatch on a meeting or training
lesson, or cover of likely approaches.
• Where commanders or advisors need to enter IF buildings it will be
necessary to designate an internal GA for intimate protection and an
external GA providing area protection.
• Communication between inside and outside will be key.
• When inside a room, the GA should ideally have his back to a wall,
able to observe the main entrance point to the room. If possible he
should also be able to secure physical access to an alternative exit
point if one exists.
• The GA should not be distracted through interaction with the
IF, allowing him to focus on his role: some pleasantries may be
unavoidable.
• When mobile and protecting a specific individual, the GA should
adopt a position at the 4 o’clock position (right hand side) approx
2-3 metres away. This will allow enough distance to see and react
to any situation.
• Elevated positions such as sangars may offer the best arcs for the
GA. But consideration needs to be given to blind spots and the ability
to move to cover them with speed.
Codewords
• YELLOW. A possible indicator of I/T or suspicious behaviour has
been seen. All personnel should be alert, reduce reaction times.
• AMBER. Clear indicators of I/T have been seen and there are
concerns over the atmospherics. All personnel should be alert and
the FP Comd / 2IC should increase security-if practiced this can be
done discreetly. This may be the opportunity to liaise with other IF
commanders.
5-110 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
• RED. Clear indicators of hostile intent have been observed and an

attack is deemed imminent. There is a need to extract immediately.
All personnel are to move immediately to the Secure Area and adopt
a defensive posture. Be prepared to move out of the IF location on
orders.
FP Comd Considerations
• Comds the patrol once Advisor with IF.
• Providing Intimate and/or Area Protection?
• Specified Tasks (over-watch meeting/lesson, cover approach or doorway,
protect advisor).
• Arcs, Area of Responsibility.
• Posture - mobile/overt/static.
• Location of Advisor(s).
• Location of GA(s), sentries and sangars.
• Location of Secure Area.
• Location of ERV.
• Location of vehs.
• IF sentries and sangars.
• IF Commander’s location and activity.
• IF rules on weapon carriage.
• Method of Alerting.
• Comms/Loss of Comms.
• Method of Challenging.
• Routes within location being visited.
• QRF Routes.
• ROE.
• Actions on
GA Considerations
• DO NOT BECOME DISTRACTED.
• Intimate and/or Area Protection.
• Specified tasks
• FF in area: Loc of Advisors, vehs, Secure Area/ERV, other Guardian
Angels, sentries and sangars
• IF sentries and sangars.
• IF Commander’s location and activity.
• IF rules on weapon carriage.
• Known IF or civ risk personalities in area
• Arcs, area of responsibility - be aware of blind spots and concealed areas.
• Posture (discrete / overt / in cover / mobile).
• Method of alerting.
• Method of challenging.
• Self Defence / ROE.
• Actions on
• Dress (PPE) & wpn state
• Language cards for STOP and PLACE WEAPON ON GROUND
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-111

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Actions on Attack
Guardian Angel Force Protection Commander
• Act within ROE - the • Take cover and assume Command

inherent right to self and Control of incident.
defence will be based • Give QBOs as required.
on your honest belief • Report attack to Ops Room, pass on
that there is an imminent detail as it becomes available.
threat to life. • Assess situation.
• Communicate threat and • Determine whether other Friendly
actions to FP Comd. Forces should remain in place or
• Observe arcs for follow- move immediately to Secure Area.
on attacks. • Update Advisor giving orders for their
• Over-watch Friendly movement including safe routes.
Forces conducting • Inform all within C/S of movement of
CASEVAC, extracting to Advisor.
Secure Area, etc. • Liaise with nearby IF for a Joint
• Remain in over-watch Response.
position unless ordered to • Consider extraction plan as
move by FP Comd. necessary.
• Request additional assets (ISTAR,
Avn, QRF) from Ops Room as
required.
Immediate Post-Incident Procedures
Force Protection Commander

• Ensure all Friendly Forces are in secure area and accounted for.
• Liaise with IF for Joint Response.
• Account for all IF in post incident: joint Op ROUND-UP.
• Ensure Ops Room has all known details on the incident.
• If possible, secure incident location as a ‘crime scene’.
• Grip rumour control and sustain internal morale.
5-112 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
POST INCIDENT PROCEDURES

Phase 1 - Contact Period Follow Up
CONTACT PERIOD FOLLOW UP

• ACTIONS-ON
• Send CONTACT REPORT
• Think OP RAT TRAP if safe
Capture or Kill insider Threat –
Ensure threat is neutralised. Four COAs:
JOINT REPONSE
COA 1 - Insider COA 2 - Insider COA 3 - Insider COA 4 -

Threat captured: Threat Flees: Is Threat killed / Potential of
there a continued injured: being overrun:
• Hard stop & threat to life?
arrest 3 sub-COA: Killed: • Extract to
• TQ safe area/
• Hot pursuit • Cfm dead heaven or
• PW pick up
• ISTAR track for • Secure wpns ERV on
• HLS Secure
future STRIKE (WIS) orders
or DETAIN • Think crime • Regroup, go
• Allow to scene injured: firm, head
escape • Provide first count
aid and protect • QBOs for
• TQ if possible C-Attack and/
or sp to QRF
• PW pick up
Inform Ops Room ‘Stand To’ for further

orders, hard stance FP
R2 – up and sideways; continued SITREPs
Increase Threat Warnings across force
Ops Room
Information Activities – Op MINIMISE; UK functions
Media (be first with the truth)
Manage follow on forces / assets
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-113

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Phase 2 – Immediate Follow Up
IMMEDIATE FOLLOW UP
CASUALTIES Remain in watch and

shoot mode, hard
stance FP & full PPE
YES (How Many) NO Freeze movement to and

from Firing Point/Contact
Point. Avoid Firing Point
by 200m
Prioritise casualties:
• Inform Ops Rm Avoid VP/Vas and choke

• 9 LINER points, think secondaries,
• MISTAT remember 5 & 20m checks
Seal off Firing Point/

Contact Point: ensure all
Await casualty teams are in safe areas
extraction. Secure
HLS if required.
Task immediate agencies

through Ops Rm:
• Top cover/AH
• QRF
• ISTAR Assets
Consider IF perceptions:
• Are they/ do they remain a threat? Select & suggest possible
• Do they need to be disarmed? ICP & IRV locations for
• De-escalate rather than escalate approval from Ops Rm
• If safe, can they assist?
5-114 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Phase 3 - Considered Follow up
CONSIDERED FOLLOW UP
Brief relevant agencies that have

arrived & task accordingly
ICP & IRV locations

approved by Ops Rm
Isolate, clear & check ICP

IRV before occupations
Provide face-to-face
brief with higher CoC
when they arrive
Task any subsequent

available Agencies through
Ops Rm. Examples:
• RESA
• REST
• WIS
• RMP
Commander send full

CONTACT REPORT
Clear out, move civilians

out of danger area using
safe route to safe area
Think forensics & Op

SCREEN, tape up, stay
out, preserve crime scene
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-115

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Medical Eligibility on Operations –

who can I treat?
Ref: JDP 4-03, Joint Medical Doctrine

On operations, Defence Medical Services (DMS) capability and capacity
is predicated on UK military Population at Risk (PAR). Eligibility for
DMS medical support will be articulated in the Medical Rules of
Eligibility, contained within Divisional, Brigade and Battlegroup
Operational Orders.
These rules are derived from the provisions of the International
Humanitarian Law, compiled during the operational process and
authorised by the Permanent Joint Headquarters (PJHQ) on advice
from Headquarters Surgeon Generals (HQSG).
Providing indiscriminate (even well meaning) medical support to the
indigenous population can undermine health sector reform, create
dependency and potentially fix elements of a deployed force.
Guidance:
Civilians - Providing medical support to civilians remains a host
nation responsibility. However, while this policy remains extant, over
time legal, ethical and operational drivers will almost inevitably lead to
DMS personnel on operations treating non UK military personnel and
civilians. The limits of what they are entitled to will be detailed in Medical
Rules of Eligibility, within Operational Orders.
Coalition partners - During the estimate for the Medical Rules of
Eligibility, assessment should be made on whether the DMS capacity
is sufficient to meet the increase in PAR (created by coalition partners)
and whether coalition partners could contribute to the medical support
plan.
Contractors - Defence will ultimately finance contractor healthcare,
either as an integral element of the contracted costs, or by providing
agreed DMS assets. Defence is also required to derive, and apply,
consistent pre-deployment health standards, and health protection
standards to contractors. Be aware of provisions needed to support
contractors assigned to you.
CPERS - CPERs are entitled to equivalent medical treatment as UK
military personnel, in theatre.
5-116 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Mechanised Unit Vehicle Rollover Drills

These apply to closed architecture vehicles (with a roof)
Ref: UOR PM Vehicle Capability Catalogue 2012 (CD Cbt)
Generic egress training is conducted in the RODET. The egress drill is:
Brace. Carry out Drop Down Drills for gunner/top cover, brace feet on
floor and hands on ceiling and prepare for impact. Do not grab seatbelt.
Orientate. Ensure you know which way is up; ID available egress points
and obstructions. Note that it may not be the nearest exit and there may
be a queue. Know which way handles must be turned.
Exit. Release seatbelt, assisting others using buddy-buddy system. If
the veh is on its side, personnel at the bottom should exit the harness
before assisting those ‘hung up’. Exit vehicle prepared to engage the
enemy/conduct casevac/conduct IED clearance etc.
Egress Drill Considerations.

• All Protected Weapon Station (PWS) and Top Cover Stations (TCS)
users must rehearse their Drop Down Drills. Note that manning
these stations will affect the veh centre of gravity.
• Veh users must be aware of egress points from both inside and
outside the vehicle so that ‘first responders’ know where and how to
assist the egressing troops.
• When near water:
• Conduct risk assessment– erosion, culverts, bridges.
• Unlock battle locks but keep doors shut to prevent swamping
by water.
• Consider slowing down, using marshalling drills, or possibly
white light if night driving.
First Responder Principles.

• Preservation of Life. This applies firstly to the responding
individuals and then to the occupants of the veh in distress. This
may require the prioritisation of activities such as the neutralisation
of enemy positions and conducting CIED procedures to reach the
immobilised veh.
• Identification of ingress points. Ingress points must be identified
on the approach to the veh. Ingress should initially be attempted via
the doors then via top cover sentry or egress hatches. Know the
locations of any First Responder Tools (FRT) and how to use them.
• Emergency Veh Ingress. Emergency ingress to the veh is through
the use of mechanical tools or cutting devices – if available from
REME. This should only be attempted once the veh occupants have
been located to ensure no further injuries are sustained.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-117

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
Specific Veh Egress drills.
Key
Triangle = Pax Main egress route
Oval = Egress point Alternate route
Usual exit point
MASTIFF 2
Front OF VEHICLE
MASTIFF 3
Front OF VEHICLE
RIDGBACK
Front OF VEHICLE
5-118 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
PROTECTION
FOXHOUND
Front OF VEHICLE
ECM
Comms
WOLFHOUND
Front OF VEHICLE
HUSKY
Front OF VEHICLE
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-119

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
EQUIPMENT CARE
• Equipment is key to combat power. Professional soldiers look after
equipment. Professional commanders check that they do.
• You must be confident that your equipment will work when you need
it. Inspect your platoon/section equipment regularly.
• Correct functioning is more important than cleanliness - check that
equipment works when you inspect it.
• Over-cleaning or incorrectly cleaning equipment will damage it.
• Know your kit - if you are familiar with it, you will know when it is not
working properly.
• If something doesn’t look right, compare it with another. If it isn’t the
same, report it.
• Report faults (to the right person) immediately.
• Hold soldiers accountable for equipment in their charge.
Weapon Care
• Keep parts affected by gas clean.
• Keep chambers clean.
• Look for faults while cleaning:
• Oversized gas holes (esp SA80).
• Excessive carbon in chokes.
• Poorly fitting parts.
• Loose rivets.
• Body Fractures.
• Extractors.
• Cam Studs.
• Springs.
• Magazines, feeds and lips.
• Oil GPMG and LMG top covers and working parts liberally. Lots
of ammo = lots of carbon; keep it clean.
• 7.62mm flannelette does not fit 5.56mm barrels.
• Keep ammunition and magazines clean.
Common faults
• SA80
• Over cleaning flash eliminator.
• Over-stripping.
• Unserviceable magazines.
5-120 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
• LMG
Stripping top cover down.
•
Not changing barrels at required intervals.
•
Not keeping gas parts clean.
•
Slamming top cover down too hard.
•
• GPMG
Stripping top cover down.
•
Getting barrels mixed up.
•
Mixing parts up.
•
Not keeping gas parts clean.
•
Not checking link assembled correctly and clean.
•
Not balancing barrels.
•
• FIST STA
Poor battery Management.
•
Batteries in the wrong way round.
•
Failing to turn kit off.
•
Crossing thread covers.
•
Loss of sight covers.
•
Not using sight covers when appropriate.
•
Scratched HMNVS lens (easily replaced).
•
Maltreatment of switches or accidentally left on.
•
• Radios.
• Pulling on radio/headset leads.
• Over-bending BOWMAN antennae gooseneck
• Snapped antennae - collapse from top end down.
• Bent coax pins - take time to check alignment.
Care of Optics
• Protect from damage when fitted and when stowed away.
• Fit protective covers.
• Know what the switches do and how they work.
• Clean glass with clean soft cloths only.
• Lightly oil the moving parts and the metal areas of the sight base.
• Cover night viewing devices during the day.
• Clean battery contacts and terminals.
• Ensure batteries in right way around.
• Save battery power - ensure sights switched.
• OFF if not being used.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-121

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Balancing the GPMG

GPMGs need balancing to ensure accuracy and to prevent stoppages.
Unbalanced guns suffer increased wear and may ‘runaway’.
• Fully screw in the gas regulator.
• Unscrew the regulator 6 clicks.
• Fire a burst of 3-5 rounds.
• Apply safety catch and pull back the cocking handle.
• Check the position of the cocking handle.
• If the handle is in line with the white mark unscrew the regulator
2 x clicks.
• Repeat steps 3-6 until the handle is forward of the white mark.
• Screw in the regulator 4 x clicks and fire a burst of 3-5 rounds.
• Check the position of the cocking handle, this time it should be in line
with the white line.
• Make a note of how many clicks the gas regulator is unscrewed, the
gun should be set to this every time before firing.
5-122 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
EQUIPMENT/VEHICLE DENIAL
Equipment Immobilisation Denial
Classified Removed and recovered. Burned.

documents
Comms Removed and recovered. E-purged where possible

Eqpt and the eqpt casing
broken. Deny by burning or
mechanical destruction.
ECM Eqpt Removed and recovered. Powered down where

possible and the eqpt
casing broken. Deny by
burning or mechanical
destruction.
Weapons Remove identical key Remove key components

components (breach or and deny by mechanical
trigger mechanism, or destruction and burning.
barrel) from each system
to prevent reassembly
through cannibalisation.
Vehicles Remove or destroy key Destroyed by burning,

components that cannot gunfire or explosives.
be readily replaced or
repaired by enemy forces.
• Equipment can be denied using the following methods:

• Mechanical. Physical destruction by use of crow bar, pick axe,
or similar implement.
• Burning. Equipment should be burnt using incendiary grenade,
oil or accelerant. Time permitting; the following issues are to be
considered:
• The removal or discharge of vehicle fire extinguishers to
prevent them from being used to prevent denial.
• If accelerant is not readily available, vehicle fuel tanks can be
punctured to obtain fuel and hydraulic fluid reservoirs should
be opened.
• Where possible, accelerant should be poured over the entire
equipment and all vehicle hatches and doors should be
opened to assist airflow.
• Accelerant vapour is extremely dangerous and caution
must be exercised; equipment should be ignited from a safe
distance or by an incendiary grenade.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-123

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
• Gunfire. Firing into wheels, engine, gearbox, transmission,

radios and ECM equipment.
• Explosives. Explosive denial is only to be carried out by suitably
trained personnel, who include: REME Recovery Mechanics, RE,
Infantry Pioneers and certain Formation Recce personnel.
Reporting
• Units are to provide a SITREP to inform Higher HQ on
completion of any equipment immobilisation or denial. The
SITREP is to detail the status of all comms and ECM equipment and
weapon systems.
5-124 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
EMERGENCY BURIAL
Principles
• Only practised in exceptional circumstances in the interests of
hygiene and to protect the human remains for subsequent recovery
and identification.
• Emergency burial may only be carried out when authorised by the
chain of Command.
• UK, NATO (except US), non-NATO, allied non-combatants and
enemy all treated in the same way.
• Allied and enemy dead must NOT be buried together.
• Indigenous dead buried in accordance with UK practice if not dealt
with by local community.
Procedures
• Record the fullest possible personal information in pencil or indelible
ink:
• Name (or “Unknown”).
• Date and cause of death.
• Date buried.
• By whom buried.
• Details of disposal of personal effects.
• For unidentified dead record:
• Fullest possible physical and dental description and fingerprints,
if possible.
• Details of numbers and markings on uniform, equipment, vehicles
or aircraft and details of nearby identified dead.
Interment
• Give separate burial to the remains, or even part remains, of each
deceased person wherever practicable.
• Locate graves as close as possible to the scene of death, grouped
by nationality and protected from water where possible.
• Bury body at least 1 metre deep, clothed and wrapped in a porous
body bag or similar.
• Place one ID disc between the teeth and the lips if, possible, or tie to
an obvious skeletal extremity.
• Group burial in a common grave is appropriate where it is known
that 2 or more remains are present but individual identification is
not possible.
• When the number to be buried is large and/or time is pressing, the
burial of a number of individual remains side by side in a trench
removes the need to dig a number of individual graves.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-125

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Marking of graves:
• Mark separate graves with an appropriate marker, high enough to be
readily seen, at the head.
• Wrap identification details in polythene and place in a waterproof
container half buried (open end down) at the base of the marker. For
US personnel, fix second ID disc to the grave marker.
• Mark group burials in a similar way, with the number of bodies and
the names of any known but unidentifiable dead recorded and placed
in the container.
• In the case of trench burials, place a marker and list in a suitable
container at each end of the grave. Indicate the distance of the
remains from the marker against the relevant entry in the list.
CBR contamination:
• Enclose the body as soon as possible in a body bag of durable plastic
or other material impervious to penetration by CBR agents and
labelled with the nature of the contamination.
• Carry out all work in full IPE.
• Mark graves with the appropriate contamination warning signs.
• Include the nature of the contamination with the identification details
in the container at the foot of the grave marker.
Personal effects. With the exception of deceased US personnel:

• Remove all personal effects (including all personal and official papers)
from the remains and place in a suitable receptacle with one ID disc.
• Make inventory of the effects on AF W3190 and enclose in
the receptacle with the effects after checking and signing by a
commissioned officer.
• Label the receptacle containing the personal effects and inventory
and backload via the G4 chain.
• Send second copy of the AF W3190 to the national logistic component
G4. Retain third in the unit.
• When removal of possessions is impractical, bury them with the body
if authorised by unit commander so long as the decision is recorded.
• Bury personal effects of deceased US personnel with the remains and
one ID disc. Attach second ID disc to the grave marker.
• Bury CBR contaminated personal effects with the remains and one ID
disc. Decontaminate second ID disc and pass to the national logistic
component HQ G1 along with the documentation.
Reports and returns:
Complete the Emergency Burial Report (EMBUREP).
Send one copy to the national logistic component HQ G1/Theatre Field
Admin Office via the chain of command.
Retain second copy in the unit.
5-126 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH
Protection against insect borne disease:
• If you are issued chemo-prophylaxis to counter the threat of Malaria
- Take them as directed.
• To avoid getting bitten by insects and contracting an insect borne
disease such as Malaria or Leishmaniasis, all personnel must
ensure they take the following steps:
• Wear long trousers and roll down sleeves, especially between
dusk and dawn.
• Wear insect repellent on hands, face, neck and any other
exposed areas.
• Make sure clothing and mosquito nets have been treated with
Peripel.
• Ensure you sleep under a mosquito net, the net is tucked under
your sleeping bag and no exposed skin is touching the net.
• Deny breeding grounds by ensuring a high level of communal /
camp hygiene and utilise Unit dry days.
Protection against ingestion disease:

• Drink only from an approved water source.
• Eat only service rations or from service approved catering
establishments.
• Maintain high standards of personal hygiene; wash hands before
you eat, and after you have been to the toilet.
• Report to your RAP/Medical Centre immediately at the first signs of
diarrhoea or vomiting.
• Maintain a high level of communal / camp hygiene to avoid attracting
rodent and insect pests.
Protection against heat injury / illness:

• Minimise exposure to the sun by covering the skin with clothing and
using sun tan / sun block cream on exposed skin.
• Be aware of the current WBGT Index reading for your location and
comply with the recommended work activity guidelines.
• Ensure all personnel are appropriately acclimatised to their working
environment.
• Protect your eyes against dust and strong sunlight with military issue
eye protection.
• Work in the shade where possible.
• Adjust your water intake to match your work rate; the table below
provides general guidance. Consult your MO for further advice
before / during RSOI.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-127

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Work Rate
Ser WBGT
Low Medium High V High
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 32°C 1.5 l/hr 1.5 l/hr N/A N/A
2 30°C 1.0 l/hr 1.5 l/hr N/A N/A
3 27°C 1.0 l/hr 1.5 l/hr 1.5 l/hr N/A
4 25°C 0.5 l/hr 1.0 l/hr 1.0 l/hr 2.0 l/hr
5 20°C 0.25 l/hr 1.0 l/hr 1.0 l/hr 1.5 l/hr
• Wearing of PLCE, helmet, ECBA or CBRN IPE will affect

recommended work activity guidelines and water consumption rates
further.
• Avoid alcohol, fizzy drinks and stimulant drinks such as ‘Red Bull’
which may lead to further dehydration.
• Salt intake from food is normally adequate to meet the body’s
requirement. In circumstances where this is not the case salt
supplementation should only be undertaken on the advice of a
Medical Officer.
Protection against cold injury:

C CLEAN - Keep clothing clean. Dirty clothing will have lower
insulation properties.
O OVERHEATING - Avoid overheating. Sweating makes clothing
wet and subsequently chills.
L LOOSE and in LAYERS - Wear clothing loose and in layers.
Trapped air insulates. When working, loosen clothing, to allow
ventilation and cooling, or remove layers.
D DRY - Keep clothing dry. Dry out socks, boots and underclothes
in your sleeping bag using body heat.
F FIT - Fit your clothing properly. Take time to adjust your clothes,
especially around your neck, waist, head, wrist and ankles.
E EXERCISE - Exercise face, fingers and toes. Regular exercise of
these body parts helps to keep the blood circulating.
E EAT - Eat your rations and keep hydrated - Avoid alcohol which
forces blood to flow near the surface of the skin, therefore loos-
ing heat. Normal energy requirements for a resting adult male
increase from 2500kcal to 5000+ kcal at -20°C
T TIGHT BOOTS - Tight boots are terrible. They constrict the blood
flow which contributes to cold feet and ultimately frost bite. Keep
feet dry and boots waterproofed.
5-128 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Personnel should also consider:

• Using issued contact gloves when temperatures fall below 0°C.
• For snow and ice work; use a high factor sun cream (25+ SPF) and
eye protection with side shields.
Protection against airborne disease:

• Where possible, try to ensure a minimum of 2m between the centre
of each bed space.
• Try to ensure there is adequate heating, lighting and ventilation
within the accommodation.
• Enforce a “CATCH IT – BIN IT – KILL IT” policy in the workplace
and accommodation.
• Regular damp dusting of workplaces and accommodation.
Protection against animal borne disease:

• Avoid contact with wild or domestic animals, (including snakes and
scorpions).
• Enforce a strict “NO CAMP MASCOT” policy.
• Following an animal bite, wounds should be thoroughly cleaned and
urgent medical attention sought, even if the wound appears trivial.
• Pre-exposure vaccine should be considered for all personnel
working in high risk areas or undertaking high risk activities where
rabies is present.
• Maintain a high level of communal / camp hygiene to avoid attracting
rodent and insect pests.
Protection against contact disease:

• Maintain a high level of personal hygiene.
• Do not share personal items such as towels, combs.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-129

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Air Despatch (AD) Planning
Ref: SOHB
PLANNING GUIDELINES
• CONOPS. When planning for an AD mission and selecting a
suitable Drop Zone (DZ), the key factors to consider are: proximity to
objective; enemy dispositions; ease of recognition from the Air; and
surface, gradient and obstacles within the proposed DZ. Of note,
HQ 2 Gp DZ procedures give details regarding selection and layout
of DZs and the Tactical Air Ops Manual (TAOM) addresses airborne
procedures and planning.
• Preparation Times. The following timings are the minimum
requirement to ensure loads can be suitably prepared on receipt of
stores:
a. 72 hrs for deliberate Ops
b. 12 hrs for emergency Ops.
• Training Air Drops. Units wishing to use AD as a training re-

supply option should first contact 47 AD Sqn Ops. This will allow
the utilisation of resources to be fully exploited. The process
for requesting MOD AT is detailed in Defence Information Note:
2010DIN03-011.
DROP ZONES
• General. The following information provides the required DZ
dimensions for the majority of Aerial Delivery systems, this
information is for planning purposes only. All DZ must be recced
and authorised before intital use in acordance with 2 Gp Tactical Air
Transport Operations Manual.
• Stores and Static Line PARA DZ Dimensions. For single store DZ
there will be no scatter factor so the DZ is a square box. Other DZs
will be trapezoid, as per the following diagram. Detailed below are
the 96% and 85% probability of success DZ dimensions for all static-
line parachuting techniques that are regularly supported by the RAF
TACAT fleet. The tables are based on a drop speed of 125 kts. Note
that yards are used rather than metres as imposed by RAF aircrews.
If dimensions are to be converted for measurement on the ground,
this must be done accurately using the scale 1 yd = 0.9144 m.
PI for first man/store

A. DZ width at the PI. A B
B. DZ width at the end D
.....of the stick.
C. Length of the stick.
D. Distance from leading
.....edge of DZ to PI. C
E. DZ length. B/2
PI for last man/store
5-130 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
1 Ton CDS Loads SC 15

Req’d Overall 96% Prob
Drop Ht 400 ft
St Size PI
PI End St DZ
1=SBS then Dist
Width St W Length Lgth
B ILP in
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 415 415 0 207 415
2 415 429 140 207 562
3 415 430 148 207 570
4 415 432 160 207 583
5 415 435 195 207 620
6 415 439 229 207 656
7 415 441 253 207 681
8 415 444 277 207 706
9 415 446 300 207 730
10 415 453 366 207 800
11 415 460 432 207 870
12 415 467 500 207 941

Drop Ht 600 ft
St Size Stick
PI End St PI Dist DZ
1=SBS time
Width St W Length in Lgth
then ILP (sec)
(a) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

1 453 453 0 226 453 0.0
2 453 467 140 226 600 2.0
3 453 468 148 226 608 2.1
4 453 469 160 226 621 2.3
5 453 473 195 226 658 2.8
6 453 477 229 226 694 3.3
7 453 479 253 226 719 3.6
8 453 482 277 226 744 3.9
9 453 4884 300 226 768 4.3
10 453 491 366 226 838 5.2
11 453 498 432 226 907 6.1
12 453 505 500 226 979 7.1
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-131

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
MSP
Drop Ht: 600 ft
PI End St St PI Dist DZ
St Size Width W Length in Lgth
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 501 501 0 251 501
2 501 532 290 251 807

Drop Ht: 700 ft
PI Stick
St PI End St DZ
Dist time
Size Width St W Length Lgth
in (sec)
(a) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

1 515 515 0 257 515 0.0
2 515 545 290 257 820 4.1
5-132 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Stores Holding
Area OUT
Holding Area
Control Point

Circuit IN
for use with 2 Group ac.

Notes:
Code Identifier should be positioned
Possible Layout of a Stores DZ
Transport Lying 250 yds 200m or 10% of drop zone length. Early
Up Area aiming markers should be positioned on
aircraft approch 400m short of code
identifier. Diagram not to scale.
Aircraft
Approach 250 yds
250 yds
SUSTAINMENT
Stores
Area
DZ HQ
Sorting
DZ Tpt Area
Salvage
Area
5-133
• DZ Marking. The following diagrams illustrate DZ layout and marking
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Smoke (1)
250 yds 250 yds
10 yds Desired
between point of
markers impact
250 yds
Steady TAL (2)
Fig 1. – DZ Marking
Notes:
1. Use if available and tactically acceptable to the Force
Commander.
2. TAL: Tactical Acquisition Light.
5-134 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Ground Release Point
Mandatory Code
Identifier (Example)
Lead in Light
(Additional Marking)
Smoke/Flare/Lights
(Additional Markings)
Example Timing
(Additional Marker/Light)
Intended Point of Impact Trailing Edge
Fig 2. – DZ Layout
Notes:
1. The markers are to be laid at the fixed distances shown in Figure

1 above, in relation to the desired points of impact, when using
carp techniques of aiming.
2. Ground markings may only be omitted if it is impossible to
position them, due to the physical features of the DZ. If any
marker is so omitted or its position in relation to the standard
layout (above) is changed, the operating authority is to be notified
before the appropriate sortie is briefed and mounted.
3. Fig 1 shows triangular panel markers, if these are not available,
three standard panels, forming a block 2 metre x 2 metre may be
used.
4. Actual Code Identifers used on an operation will be decided
by the units concerned for operational security reasons. Code
Identifers used below are for examples only.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-135

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Basic Knots

Reef Knot. Can be used to join two ropes of even diameter

Sheet Bend
Single: to join two ropes of unequal dimensions when the larger is not
more than 1.5 times the diameter of the smaller. Use a Double (in box
at right) when the larger is 1.5 to 2.5 times the diameter of the smaller.
Half hitch. A component of many knots. Used to secure the running

(free) end of other knots.

Timber hitch. Component of diagonal lashing. Also used to pull heavy

weights.
5-136 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Ref: Military Engineering Vol II Pam 1 Part 2
Draw hitch. Tying a rope to a post or ring so that it can be

instantly released by a pull on the running end i.e. a boat
mooring rope.
a b
c

Clove hitch. Used in lashings. To secure a rope to a spar with
access to rope end (a) or without (b to c)

Bowline. Makes a non-slip loop. Can be used as an

emergency safety line
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-137

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT

Bowline on a bite: As above but gives a double loop.

Running Bowline. Provides an easy running loop. Simply tie a small
bowline around the running end of the rope.
5-138 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Lashings
Used to form temporary structures with round timber. Good for
comparatively light loads as the cordage (rope) takes the strain of the
weight. Cordage shrinks and stretches when wet or dry, so lashings
need maintenance. Each turn of the lashing should be beaten into
position with wood or round metal to get them tight.
Square Lashing. Makes a 90 degree lashing i.e. stretcher frame.
1. Start with a clove hitch 2. Make 4 complete turns

underneath the weight pulling then beating tight.
bearing spar.
3. With free end make 2 4. Complete the lashing with

trapping turns, pulling then 2 half hitches on the weight
beating tight. bearing spar.
Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 5-139

Content Pages
2 3 4 5
SUSTAINMENT
Diagonal Lashing. Makes an angled lashing i.e. A frame.
1. Start with a timber hitch 2. Make 3 complete turns

around both spars plus vertically, pulling then beating
three complete turns. tight.
3. Make 2 trapping turns, 4. Finish with 2 half hitches

pulling and beating tight. above the lashing.
5-140 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Ac71770 2015 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ac71770 2015 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content Pages

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Prepared under the direction of

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Army Knowledge Exchange (AKX)

British Army Electronic Battlebox (BAeBB)

DCDC Joint Doctrine Webpage

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 I

II Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Accident and Incident Notification IX

Fighting Power 1-1

Tac and Ground Brief 2-1

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 III

Effects/Action Terms and Graphics 2-18

IV Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 V

Battlefield Discipline 4-1

Understanding & Information Activity

VI Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 VII

IED Actions On 5-87

VIII Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Reporting of Incidents and Accidents. The following are notifiable

Notification Procedure. In the case of death and serious injury

Means Number Remarks

Civ Fax +44 (0)1264 382059 On Mod Form 510 if possible

Mil Fax 94391 2059 On Mod Form 510 if possible

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 IX

ANY DOUBTS REPORT IT

Joint Casualty and Compassionate Cell (JCCC)

The LAND Accident Investigation Team (LAIT)

Serious Equipment Failure Inspection Team (SEFIT)

UK - 96798 2540 or (+44) (0)306 7982540

Joint Services EOD Ops Centre

Local Fire Advisor

ANY DOUBTS REPORT IT

X Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

Prepared under the direction of

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

• Conceptual - the ideas behind how we fight

These are described in the diagram below:

THE PRINCIPLES OF WAR

Selection and Maintenance of the Aim Concentration of Force

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-1

Selection and Maintenance of the Aim. The Master Principle of War. A

• Contested. Adversaries will contest all environments where they

LAND DOCTRINE HIERARCHY

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-3

THE MANOEUVRIST APPROACH

1-4 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

• Shock Action. The sudden, concentrated application of violence

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-5

1-6 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

THE 6 MILITARY ACTIVITIES IN THE LAND

Deliberate and Focused Intervention. As part of a DI, UK Forces will

• Understanding - the collection of information by ISTAR activity

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-7

The Geographic Framework:

1-8 Issue 7.0 1 June 2015

The COIN / Stabilisation Framework:

Defence Capability Framework:

THE TACTICAL FUNCTIONS

Issue 7.0 1 June 2015 1-9